JP2020006237A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing a display area.SOLUTION: Out of an identification image combination as a combination representing a winning, identification images other than one identification image are stationarily displayed, and the residual one identification image is displayed in a dynamically-displaying special dynamic display mode, by dynamic display mode display control means of display control means. The special dynamic display mode includes: a single special dynamic display mode of stationarily displaying identification images other than one identification image out of a combination representing one winning; and a multiple special dynamic display mode of stationarily displaying the identification images other than the one identification image out of a combination representing a plurality of winnings. The respective identification images displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode are, during a first period, individually displayed in different areas, and, during a second period, the stationarily-displayed different identification images are displayed in a same area, and the residual one identification image is dynamically displayed at a different area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a jackpot effect according to the result of the drawing on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

  In such a pachinko machine, a display area for displaying a determination symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is driven in a special effect mode different from the determination symbol or a drive device driven on the front side of the display area to produce a game effect. There is something to do.

JP 2011-125416 A

  In this type of pachinko machine, when the drive device is driven to a position where viewing is obstructed, or when a special effect mode is displayed, if a determination symbol is displayed at a visible position, the visible display area may be limited. Was.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively utilizing a display area.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a display means having a display screen, and a dynamic display on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display form, followed by an identification image in a display form showing a lottery result. Display control means for stopping and displaying the game, and by notifying the lottery result of the game by combining some of the plurality of different identification images, the display control means, if the first period, the A change display in which the identification image is dynamically displayed in a first area of the display screen, and in a second period, the identification image is displayed in a second area smaller than the first area of the display screen. A dynamic display in which a control means and a combination of identification images indicating a win are displayed in a special dynamic display mode in which a display other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed. Aspect A special special dynamic display mode, wherein the special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which a display other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed, and a plurality of hits. Among the combinations shown, a multiple special dynamic display mode in which a display other than one identification image is stopped and displayed is set, and each of the identification images displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode is the first During the period, the different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed in the same region during the second period, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed in the different region during the second period. Things.

  In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is one of the identification images. The other identification images are displayed with increased transparency.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed. Is switched and displayed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the first aspect of the invention, after the dynamic display is performed on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result.

  The display control means dynamically displays the identification image in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and the second area which is smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. The identification image is displayed by the change display control means. A dynamic display mode of the display control means in a special dynamic display mode in which a display other than one identification image among the combinations of identification images indicating combinations of hits is stopped and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed. Displayed by the display control means.

  The special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which one of the combinations indicating one hit is stopped and displayed other than one identification image, and a combination other than one identification image among the combinations indicating a plurality of hits. The double special dynamic display mode in which the display is stopped is set. Each identification image displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode is individually displayed in a different area during the first period, and the different identification images stopped and displayed in the same area during the second period. Then, the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area.

  Accordingly, even in the multiple special dynamic display mode, the display space of the identification image displayed in the second area can be configured to be smaller in a state where each of the identification images can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to secure a larger area in which an image other than the identification image can be displayed in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be presented with an effect having an impact different from the normal time in the second period.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, in addition to the effects of the first aspect of the invention, in the multiple special display mode displayed during the second period, other than the one identification image of the different identification images stopped and displayed. Since the identification images are displayed with high transparency, there is an effect that each identification image can be more easily viewed even when two identification images are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, in addition to the effects of the first or second aspect of the invention, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, of the different identification images stopped and displayed, Since one is switched and displayed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied, there is an effect that a plurality of identification images can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner in an area where one identification image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which showed the display area at the time of displaying a 3rd symbol on the 3rd symbol display device of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure in another example of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display area when displaying the 3rd design on the 3 design display. (A) is a figure showing an example of a double reach display mode displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is an example of a case where the third symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area. FIG. (A)-(b) is a figure which showed an example when the 3rd symbol was scroll-displayed in the reduced display area in time series. (A) is a figure showing an example of a single-reach display mode displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is an example of a case where the third symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a third symbol is displayed in a reduced display area of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a reduced display of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when a third symbol is displayed in an area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram explaining a third symbol set in a display data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically about the content of a 3rd symbol about an example of the display data table when a 3rd symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a task process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol calculation process which is one process of the task process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol reduction display process which is one process of the symbol calculation process performed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an image data creation process executed by an image controller in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol reduction display process 2 which is one process of the symbol calculation process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol reduction display process 3 which is one process of the symbol calculation process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed symbol operation processing 2 which is one processing of task processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 4th embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 11), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of a "city stage", an "empty stage", and an "island stage" are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in response to the change, so that the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. And at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", both are in the special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and then, as the added value after the big hit is "big hit A", the next big hit is Until that time, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced until the lottery is executed (until the change of the special symbol is started) 100 times after the end of the big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during the probable change of the special symbol). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is the state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probable change period of the special symbol are common, and according to the type of the jackpot, `` the time reduction of the ordinary symbol '' The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” ends, the “normal symbol time reduction state” ".

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) can be realized with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) by using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern is composed of nine types of main patterns each having a number “1” to “9” and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, a main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as an octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, an interruption, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. ing. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display screen, the symbols in each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set on the display screen. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit A or a big hit B.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “probable symbols”, and when a jackpot A, which is a 16R variable jackpot, occurs, the same symbol is used. The combination of probable symbols is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “normal symbols”, and when a jackpot B, which is a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is used. Stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and the The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

<Symbol reduction display>
Next, the display area of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of the display area of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol is an area of the normal display area PL1 in a normal state when the variable display for notifying the result of the lottery is performed based on the lottery of the game, and is shown in FIG. 5B as described above. Thus, the third symbol is displayed. On the other hand, although details will be described later, when displaying the third symbol in a reduced size, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2 shown in FIG. 6A. When the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2, a display other than the third symbol is executed in the normal display area PL1.

  Although the reduced display area PL2 is a horizontally long area as shown in FIG. 6A, it may be a vertically long area as shown in FIG. 6B. 6A, the display area above the reduced display area in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively and widely used. Therefore, for example, when displaying a display mode in which the display screen is scrolled down from the top, the display area can be used in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  When the reduced display area PL2 is a vertically long area as shown in FIG. 6B, the display area on the right side of the reduced display area PL2 can be effectively used widely. Therefore, for example, when displaying a display mode in which the display area is scrolled from the right to the left, the display area can be used in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  The setting of the reduced display area PL2 may be fixed in advance, or the reduced display area PL2 may be changed as shown in FIG. 6A in accordance with the display mode when the third symbol is reduced and displayed. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether to set a horizontally long area or a vertically long area as shown in FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the display style displayed in the normal display area PL1 becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the third symbol when the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2.

  Further, when a driving device that is driven (movable) is arranged at a position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the reduced display area PL2 may be appropriately determined according to the driving position of the driving device. . When the third symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, a display device different from the third symbol display device 81 which is not displayed is provided, and the third symbol is changed on the display device at a predetermined timing. You may comprise so that it may be switched so that it may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can effectively show the display mode to be displayed in the normal display area PL1, and can easily notify the player of the fluctuation display of the third symbol. Therefore, even if the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is not displayed and a display mode (for example, display of a character or the like) different from that of the third symbol is displayed, the third symbol display device 81 is different from the third symbol display device 81. Since the third symbol is displayed on a different display device, it can be easily determined that the lottery result is still being displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, details of a display mode of the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 and the reduced display area PL2 will be described. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of the variable display of the third symbol in the normal display area PL1 of the third symbol display device 81. When the third symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, as described with reference to FIG. 5, the third symbol is displayed in three symbol columns (Z1 to Z3), and the displayed symbol is displayed. The result of the hit determination is notified by the combination of the third symbols displayed on the five activated lines (L1 to L5) of the symbols. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the third symbol, scroll display (in the present embodiment, from left to right) of all the third symbols displayed at the timing of the change start is started, as described later. After scroll display (dynamic display) at high speed, the display is switched to variable display at low speed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and then the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed. At this time, when the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines (L1 to L5), the reach display mode is set, and the player is notified by characters or voice such as "reach". On the other hand, if the reach display mode has not been reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is scroll-displayed at a low speed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed to notify the player that the lottery result has been lost.

  In the example of FIG. 7 (a), the left symbol L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 is a third symbol showing an 8 symbol with a main symbol of the angelfish numbered "8", and the middle symbol L2 is a sub symbol of a shell symbol, Nine symbols with the number "9" added to the main symbol of the crab are stopped and displayed on the right line L3. In the lower symbol row Z3, 9 symbols are displayed on the left line L1, a shell symbol is displayed on the middle line L2, and a lower right line L4 is displayed with 8 symbols stopped on the right line L3. This shows that the reach display mode is a double reach display mode with nine symbols.

  When the reach display mode is set, the middle symbol row Z2 is scroll-displayed at a low speed. Then, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern set so that the driving device 800 is driven to the driving position, the driving device 800 is switched to the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Is driven to a position overlapping the front side of the normal display area PL1. In accordance with the driving of the driving device 800, the third symbol is reduced and displayed from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2. At this time, the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is not displayed, and the light effect display mode displayed in conjunction with the driving of the driving device 800 is displayed.

  Here, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2, which is reduced and displayed, of the eight symbols and the nine symbols displayed in the double reach display mode, nine symbols, which are positively variable symbols, are reduced and reduced. Displayed in display area PL2. The nine symbols displayed here are displayed in a state where only the main symbol of the crab is reduced and displayed. Thereby, the area for displaying the third symbol can be made smaller. Also, even in the double-reach display mode, by reducing and displaying only the probable symbol, the player has been changed to reach with the normal symbol, or if the jackpot is a normal symbol, By recognizing it, it is possible to prevent a problem that the desire to play is attenuated.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the double-reach display mode, of the third symbols constituting the double-reach display mode, only the positively-variable symbols are displayed in the single-reach display mode. Although described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that only normal symbols are displayed in the single-reach display mode. With this configuration, when the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 and the process of notifying the jackpot or the like by stopping the central symbol is executed, even in the case of the probability change jackpot (jackpot A), the normal jackpot (jackpot) is used. Also in B), it is possible to inform the player that the big hit is a normal symbol. In the case of displaying in the single-reach display mode of the probable variable symbol, if a normal jackpot (jackpot B) is won, the jackpot cannot be notified. On the other hand, by displaying in a normal pattern, for the time being, it informs the player that it is a normal jackpot for the time being, and then informs the player that the actual jackpot has been changed to further increase the player. Can please. On the other hand, if the jackpot is reported with the probability change symbol, and subsequently, it is reported that the jackpot has been a normal jackpot, the player will be discouraged, and the willingness to play the game will be reduced. However, with the configuration of this alternative example, such a problem can be solved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the nine symbols displayed in the upper symbol column Z1 are replaced with the left symbol of the reduced display line S1 in the reduced display area PL2. , The nine symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as right symbols of the reduced display line S1 in the reduced display area PL2. As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, the third symbol is scroll-displayed in the middle symbol of the reduced display line S <b> 1 in the reduced display area PL <b> 2. The width of the reduced display area PL2 in the up-down direction is made up of one or more and less than two reduced third symbols, and the width in the left-right direction of displaying the middle symbol of the reduced display area PL2 is the same as the width in the left-right direction. Three symbols are configured with a width of one or more and less than two. Therefore, by scrolling the third symbol in the vertical direction of the reduced display area, the scrolling of the third symbol can be performed in a space-saving manner and easily viewed. In the normal display area PL1, the third symbol is scroll-displayed by horizontal scrolling from right to left, but the third symbol is scroll-displayed by vertical scrolling from lower to upper. The player can easily notice that the third symbol is displayed. Therefore, if the third symbol is hidden from the normal display area PL1 and the third symbol is hidden before the result of the lottery is notified, it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player. .

  Further, when the third symbol is horizontally scrolled in the reduced display area PL1, the period in which the symbol is interrupted and displayed becomes longer, and it is difficult for the player to determine the third symbol. The period in which the entire three symbols can be displayed can be lengthened, and the player can easily identify the third symbol. In addition, since the third symbol in the present embodiment is a horizontally long symbol, in a display area for displaying the horizontally long third symbol, vertical scrolling is easy for a player to see. In the case where a vertically long display area is set, it is easier to see by scrolling horizontally. Therefore, by appropriately determining the scrolling direction according to the size and shape of the symbol and the shape of the display area, the third symbol can be easily recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, FIG. 9 illustrates a case of a single reach display mode in which one type of reach display mode is established, while FIG. 8 illustrates the double reach display mode. As shown in FIG. 9A, the upper symbol row Z1 has four symbols in the middle line L2 with sharks as the main symbol and the number "4", and the lower symbol row Z3 also has four symbols in the middle line L2. The single reach display mode in which the stop display is performed is shown. When the driving device 800 is driven to the driving position as shown in FIG. 9B, the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is not displayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. It is displayed reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the reduced display area PL2, by performing vertical scrolling from bottom to top, the symbol can be configured to fluctuate in the opposite direction (the third symbol is variably displayed in descending order). It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice that the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the third symbol is variably displayed in the reduced display area PL2 by vertical scrolling from bottom to top is described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and vertical scrolling from top to bottom may be used, and the symbol may be rotated. The symbol may be displayed in a variable manner, or the symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner and displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, not only by scroll display but also by displaying the color of the symbol in a color different from the color displayed in the normal display area PL1 (only the middle symbol or all symbols may be displayed), the player can easily notice. The configuration may be as follows. As described above, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is displayed in a different scroll display method, a different color, a different effect, or the like from the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1. It can be easily configured to be realized.

  In FIGS. 7 to 9, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL <b> 2 is omitted (transparent or hidden) from the numeral indicating the symbol number, thereby displaying the third symbol. Although the configuration is such that the space can be made smaller, it is also possible to reduce the size of the third symbol in the same manner as displayed in the normal display area PL1 and display it in the reduced display area PL2. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the reduced display area PL2, as a left symbol, four main symbols (shark sharks) displayed in the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 displayed in the normal display area PL1. The main symbols (shark symbols) of four symbols displayed on the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3 displayed on the normal display area PL1 are displayed as the right symbols. In the middle symbol, a third symbol is vertically scrolled and displayed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when a symbol is reduced, each symbol may be gradually displayed smaller, and the symbol may be moved from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to more easily understand and recognize that the display of the symbol is switched from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player loses the symbol.

  In addition, not only the pattern is gradually reduced, but also a display mode in which the display frame of the normal display area PL1 is displayed by a black line or the like and the frame is gradually reduced to the reduced display area PL2 is displayed. Is also good. Further, the present invention is not limited to the black line and the like, and may be configured to display a light effect or the like like an area frame.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and also the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of the big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting an outage type of stop in a special symbol, A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 28). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to a special value. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it decides that it is the big hit of the special design. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers which are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first random number is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the value corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 107, 282" is a special symbol for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). This makes it difficult to predict the random number value that will be a special symbol jackpot, thereby suppressing fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 in the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a large-hit table is provided for a high-probability state in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 89, so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely deviated” is easily selected. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99 and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely out of order".

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long production time can be performed, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 28) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. I have.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, “variable normal reach”, “variable super reach”, “variable special reach” as variation patterns for the deviation. Various types are defined, and as the variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of a total of 240 random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random numbers, and thus the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 28).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 12, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 28), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 27). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, respectively.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Out of the vacant areas from 1 area to the reserved fourth area, the area numbers are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 21 and S405 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, is changed to the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 24).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 in FIG. 25: No).

  The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203e is set to zero, and the main controller 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value according to the big hit type is set. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203e.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the "big hit B" is set, it is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 21). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuating effect is completed until the value of the counter 203e during working hours is reduced to 0 (S217 in FIG. 21).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203e during time saving is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on a random number per symbol symbol for a high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during time saving is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table for the ordinary symbols for the low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 24).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores various other flags, data, and the like necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls setting of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as “display”. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The sound lamp control device 222 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 has at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and another memory area 223z. .

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1602 in FIG. 32). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 32).

  The RAM 223 further has another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 33) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and outputs one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data in the resident video RAM 235, so that there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Last address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read over time from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Also, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. In the present embodiment, this is an area for storing data corresponding to “display the characters“ Please hold for a while during power-on ”). In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 33).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. (In this embodiment, the character "Please hold for a while during power-on") on the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image of a "O" symbol and a "O" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen At the same position, a power-on fluctuation image of a "X" symbol is alternately displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the "○" image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", the "x" image is displayed for the variable effect. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area From the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) numbered "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a dolphin, a shark, a shrimp, etc. is also resident as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. Can be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thus, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately even if the character ROM 234 is a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character data ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for drawing an image, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This area stores transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect , A display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the first entrance is released. When the ball easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. If there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variable effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are set according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And light in the image, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is specified. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time from when the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the back type (or the third symbol display device 81). May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which a range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

<Display data table (3rd design)>
The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the number continuity. be able to.

  Next, the display data of the third symbol set in the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 shows only an example of the data for the third symbol (symbol 1 to symbol 3) in the example of the display data table. Symbols 1 to 3 indicate information of symbols to be displayed in symbol columns Z1 to Z3, respectively. As shown in FIG. 16, during the period from address 0001H to address 01F4H, the symbols are scrolled on the third symbol display device 81 at high speed from right to left. Specifically, by changing the symbol type offset for each address (for example, one symbol plus one symbol), the symbols are scrolled and displayed at high speed. In this case, by designating the symbol with an offset from the stop symbol of the previous variation, the variation from the previous stop symbol can be smoothly and smoothly executed. Switching from high-speed scroll fluctuation to low-speed scroll fluctuation is triggered by the address 01F4H. In the low-speed scroll fluctuation, for example, the symbol type offset information is changed every ten addresses or the like (for example, the symbol plus one), so that the speed at which the symbol is scroll-displayed is reduced. In the low-speed fluctuation period, the symbol type offset information becomes the offset information from the stop symbol of the current fluctuation, and continuity can be easily provided to the stop symbol.

  Next, FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a display data table corresponding to a variation pattern when the third symbol is changed from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2 and displayed, and only information on the third symbol will be described. It is extracted and shown. From the address 0001H to the address 2711H, the symbols 1 to 3 are scroll-displayed in the horizontal direction in the normal display area PL1. At address 2711H, symbol 1 and symbol 3 are in the reach state in which they stop at the same symbol in the normal display area PL1. Thereafter, when the address reaches 04E2H, the symbol 2 is reduced to the reduced display area PL2 and the symbol 2 is scroll-displayed in the reach state. At the address 06D6, the symbols 1 to 3 are stopped and displayed in the normal display area PL1 in the same symbols as the stopped symbols.

  As described above, since the variation pattern in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is also set in the display data table, it is easy to select the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. The control of the reduced display can be executed.

  In a case where the reduced display of the third symbol is reduced step by step and the third symbol is gradually moved to the reduced display area PL2, the display data table may include the enlargement ratio and the display position coordinates with time. By setting each of them, display control can be easily performed. Also, when displaying an effect, a display frame, or the like for notifying that the third symbol is to be reduced and moved to the reduced display area PL2, the display data table is set to an address corresponding to a predetermined timing. By doing so, the display can be easily controlled.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 19) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on a result of a lottery performed based on a winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 18 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 18 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 18, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 19) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 18, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 33). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 46B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 35 ()), and When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 35) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (Refer to S2109 of (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 38) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 39 to 41) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 46A), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sets the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 19) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 19) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 19) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 35 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S2605 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 19), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw one frame of image generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is output for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged at the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged at the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 35 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S2607 of FIG. 39). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of the other sprite that is to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 48).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 35B) is executed, it is performed (see S3502 of FIG. 48).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and thereafter, A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entrance 67 through the through gate. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what the jackpot type is among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type is determined. If is a big hit A, the setting related to the big hit A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability of changing the jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time savings (100 in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203e is equal to or greater than 1 (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). The special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is carried out (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (probable change) (S302). If the game is in the high-probability game state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability (S303).

  In the process of S303, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 30 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, the random number value to be a special symbol jackpot is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168”. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the If the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the low probability probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of “7, 107, 282” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol big hit, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random numbers of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is (S305: Yes), The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S306). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. Determine the pattern (fluctuation time). The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the variation pattern table 202a (see FIG. 11).

  For example, as the variation patterns for the departure, “departure”, various types of “normal reach departure”, various types of “super reach departure”, and various types of “special reach departure” are defined. Variation patterns for jackpot A include various types of "probably variable jackpot normal reach", various types of "probable variable jackpot super reach", and various types of "probable variable jackpot special reach". Variation patterns for jackpot B include various types of "normal jackpot normal reach" , "Normal jackpot super reach" and "Normal jackpot special reach" are specified.

  In the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off-design.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined from the variation pattern table 202a shown in FIG. 11 (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation pattern of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S311). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 28). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. While being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the during-hours counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is equal to or greater than 1 (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, and the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the first entrance 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is not required. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and thus is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 13B).

  In the processing of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a regular symbol (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0, 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 13B).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “と し て” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the motorized accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two times (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Note that the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S620 or S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 28) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 20), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the second entrance 67, and when a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S703: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 21) and the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or the specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 24). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 24), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 26 has been executed, the processing at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1001 to S1007 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 221 of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1318 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 30), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1318 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1318 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1318 (see S1317 in FIG. 30). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is performed, so that the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is on is instantaneous in this startup process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1204 to S1206 passes through the process of S1208. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process skips S1209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1211), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1209 is skipped is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is performed via the process in S1206, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the processing of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processing relating to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1312, the command determination process in S1311, and the process of updating the counter values in S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to perform notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be done. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off processing is executed (S1316). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1317), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball count command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In the process of S1408, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1408, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1408 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1407, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1407: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed (S1409). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). The variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1605. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then, in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1605). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1605: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1606). Then, in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1607).

  In the process of S1608, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the exact stop type (complete loss, front / rear reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.).

  In the process of S1609, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1609). . The display control device 114 receives the stop type command for display, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 33). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S1802 in FIG. 33) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B), the simple command determination processing is performed so that the power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. (See S2108 in FIG. 35B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 35B).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power is also increased. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1805, interruption permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1806, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 19) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a symbol determination process is executed (S2104). In this symbol determination processing (S2104), the variation state of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (whether or not high-speed variation is in progress) is determined, and based on the state, the third symbol is displayed. A process for determining three symbols is executed. The symbol determination processing (S2104) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Next, task processing is executed (S2105). In this task process, the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109) and the symbol determination process (S2104) is specified. Based on the content, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite. The task processing (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2106). In this transfer setting process (S2106), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is being operated. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2107). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2106) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 19 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing processing according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2108). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2108, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2102), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), and returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402. In the above-described task process (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of the drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2402.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is (S2208: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2502). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2501, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S2502 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2208, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2208: No), then, a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes) ), And execute the respective processes from S2202 to S2210 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2201 to S2210 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 37A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 37B), which are processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 37A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2601). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2601: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S2602 to S2604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S2602), and then S2603 to S2604. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the processing of S2603, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2603: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2604).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2701).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2701, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S2702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2604) or in the process of S2603, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2603: No), the process proceeds to S2605.

  In S2605, a pointer update process is performed (S2605). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S2801). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S2802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a display data table for demonstration (S2803), and if it is a display data table for demonstration (S2803: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S2804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S2805), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2803, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S2803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S2802: No), the process ends and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2606). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2606 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S2607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2608). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S2608: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S2608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S2609).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S2609: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S2610), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S2612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2613). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2614), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S2615), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S2615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2105), until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2615, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2609, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S2609: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2616). If the demonstration display flag is OFF (S2616: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S2617), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2618). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2620), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2621), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S2616, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S2616: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, the image of the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the above-described symbol determination processing (S2104), which is one of the symbol determination processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the symbol determination processing (S2104).

  In the symbol determination process (S2104), first, it is determined whether or not the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is in the high-speed fluctuation period (S2820). Here, whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed can be determined based on the position of the pointer indicating the processing of the set display data table.

  As shown in FIG. 15, information of symbols to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table. At each address, symbol information whose display content is updated every 20 ms is set. FIG. 16 shows only the symbol information of the display data table extracted for easy understanding. The configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not the period is a high-speed change period, corresponding to each address. In the high-speed fluctuation period, the symbol type offset information is set to be changed, for example, for each address (every time the pointer is updated). With this setting, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed every 20 ms, and it is possible to show the player that the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed. In the low-speed fluctuation period, the symbol offset information is changed and set every ten addresses (every time the pointer is updated ten times). With this setting, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed every 200 ms, so that the player can be seen as if the variable symbol is displayed at a low speed. In this way, by appropriately setting the symbol type offset information in the display data table, the speed at which the third symbol is variably displayed can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed for each of the third symbols is set in the display data table. However, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol row data to be displayed is displayed as a symbol. The display range may be set in advance, and the display range may be set by the offset information of the display data table. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set offset information and the like for each of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the data amount of the display data table can be reduced.

  If it is determined that the period is the high-speed change period (S2820: Yes), the symbol in which the predetermined symbol number is offset from the previous stopped symbol of the third symbol based on the symbol type offset information set in the display data table. Third symbols to be displayed in the columns Z1 to Z3 are determined (S2821).

  Specifically, based on the symbols stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the previous symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols to be displayed are determined by offsetting the offset amount indicated by the symbol type offset information therefrom. The symbols displayed on the middle line L2 and the right line L3 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are determined based on the symbols displayed on the left line L1.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2820, if it is determined that the period is other than the high-speed fluctuation period, the offset amount indicated by the symbol type offset information set in the display data table from the symbol of the current fluctuation stop is added to the process of S2821. The symbols to be displayed are determined and set in the drawing list (S2822). Here, not only during the low-speed fluctuation period, but also during the period in which the third symbol is stopped, the symbol to be displayed is determined based on the offset amount from the stopped symbol determined by the current fluctuation.

  As described above, in the high-speed fluctuation period, since the symbol to be displayed is determined by the offset from the stop symbol in the previous fluctuation, the scroll fluctuation of the symbol can be performed without discomfort from the state where the fluctuation is stopped last time. Further, when switching from the high-speed fluctuation period to the low-speed fluctuation period, by switching the processing to the offset from the stop symbol determined by the current fluctuation, the scroll display up to the stop symbol can be performed without discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, details of the above-described task processing (S2105), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this task processing (S2105).

  In the task process (S2105), first, a background calculation process is executed (S2901). In the arithmetic processing for the background, the control update target of this time is grasped from the backmost still image and the background sprite which constitute the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a two-dimensional plane, a rotation angle, a scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 233 in correspondence with each individual image.

  In subsequent S2902, effect calculation processing is executed (S2902). In the effect calculation process, among the effect sprites constituting an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect, the current control update target is grasped. Further, the above various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 233 so as to correspond to various individual images.

  In the subsequent process of S2903, a symbol calculation process is executed (S2903). In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be subjected to the fluctuation display in each game time. Also. The various parameters described above are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in areas secured in the work RAM 233 so as to correspond to various individual images. The symbol calculation process (S2903) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After that, in the process of S2904, after performing the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, the present task process ends. In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, the process of grasping the individual image included in the image of one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction among the individual images subjected to the control update by the processes of S2901 to S2903. Execute

  This grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the currently set drawing range and the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has been started, but are only the individual images to be displayed, so that the image controller 237 selects the individual images to be displayed. There is no need to do this, and even if no selection is made, there is no need to wastefully perform drawing processing on individual images that are not display targets. Thereby, the processing load on the image controller 237 is reduced.

  Next, the symbol calculation process (S2903), which is one of the task processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the symbol calculation process (S2903).

  In the symbol calculation process (S2903), first, various parameters such as coordinates, size, and rotation angle are calculated and derived for the symbol sprite data displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S3001), and the derived various parameters are calculated. The control information is updated by writing the parameter information in the area secured in the work RAM 233 in correspondence with the symbol sprite data (S3002). Next, it is determined whether it is the execution timing to partially display the symbol of the third symbol (S3003). Whether or not it is time to display a part is determined by referring to information specified by the current pointer in the currently set display data table. Here, the state where the partial display of the symbol is executed is, if the symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, if there is a symbol displayed outside the normal display area PL1. The symbols must be displayed in a completely transparent state. When a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction, so that the symbol in the horizontal direction (for example, half of the symbol in the horizontal direction) is displayed in a completely transparent state. On the other hand, when the reduced display is set, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, among the symbols displayed in the reduced display area PL2, the central symbol in the central row scrolls vertically. Therefore, depending on the coordinates (position) where the symbol is displayed, a part of the symbol displayed outside the reduced display area PL2 is displayed in a completely transparent state. When the display is reduced, as shown in FIG. 8A or 8C, a part of the design in the vertical direction (for example, the upper half) is displayed in a completely transparent state.

  If it is determined that it is time to perform partial display (S3003: Yes), it is determined whether it is during the reduced display period (S3004).

  Here, partial α data related to symbol display and overall α data described later will be described. As described above, the α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance as image data. α data is individually set for image data that defines individual images such as background data and sprite data, but for design sprite data, α data for the whole and α data for parts are set respectively. Have been.

  The design sprite data includes an image area to be displayed on the display screen as an individual image, and a frame area surrounding the image area. The frame region enables the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 to handle the design sprite data as rectangularly defined image data regardless of the outer edge shape of the image region, thereby facilitating designation of coordinates.

  The size of the whole α data is set so that the outer shape matches the design sprite data to be applied. The overall α data includes an image corresponding region occupying the inside of the outer edge portion and a frame corresponding region occupying the outside of the outer edge portion, with the outer edge portion of the image region in the design sprite data to be applied as a boundary.

  For each pixel included in the frame-corresponding region, “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as the α value. On the other hand, 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion of the image corresponding region except the outer edge portion.

  By applying the whole α data to the symbol sprite data, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding region is applied to each pixel included in the image region, and further, each of the pixels included in the frame region is included. The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding region is applied to the pixel.

  In this case, as described above, the size of the whole α data is set so that the outer shape matches the design sprite data to be applied. Therefore, by setting the size and the rotation angle of both data to be the same and setting both data so that the reference pixel such as one pixel at the center overlaps, the entire α data can be applied to the symbol sprite data. The processing load related to the setting is reduced. This is the same for the partial α data.

Further, when the design sprite data to which the general α data is applied is superimposed with the image data overlapping on the back side of the display screen, the α value defined in the general α data is set for each dot related to the superposition. Fusion (that is, blending) of the reference numerical information is performed. In particular,
R: “R value of rear image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “R value of front image” × “α value”
G: “G value of rear image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “G value of front image” × “α value”
B: “B value of back image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “B value of front image” × “α value”
It becomes. This is the same for the partial α data.

  By applying the α data for the whole, in the design after the application, the frame region is in a completely transparent state, and only the image region is visible. In addition, shaggy that occurs in the outline of the design is reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the outline of the design fuses with the background. That is, anti-aliasing can be performed.

  On the other hand, the size of the partial α data is set so that the outer shape matches the design sprite data to be applied. The partial α data has an outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image region in the design sprite data to be applied as a boundary, and a non-part corresponding area occupying the inside of the outer edge portion.

  For each pixel included in the corresponding region other than a part, “0” which is complete transmission information is set as the α value. On the other hand, in the partial image corresponding region, “1” which is opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion excluding the outer edge portion, and an α value is set for each pixel included in the outer edge portion. Is set as 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. It is determined whether the symbol is in the reduced display period in which the symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 (S3004). If it is determined that it is during the reduced display period (S3004: Yes), the α data for the vertical portion of the symbol sprite data is grasped (S3005). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol display period is displayed in the normal display area PL1 (S3004: No), α data for the horizontal portion of the symbol sprite data is set (S3006). . Here, when a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is horizontally scrolled and displayed in a fluctuating manner, so that the horizontal area where the symbol is displayed outside the normal display area PL1 is in a completely transparent state. Is displayed.

  It is determined whether it is necessary to set the entire α data (S3007). Here, it is determined whether it is necessary to display the entire symbol in a transparent state. In the case where the entire symbol is displayed in a completely transparent state, it is set when it is necessary to show the background on the back side of the symbol as an effect. Further, even during the high-speed fluctuation display, the whole α data is set because the symbols need to be transparently displayed. As a result, the symbols can be displayed collectively in the transmission state, and the load in the transmission control can be reduced. Further, the α data for the whole is configured to be set for each symbol, but may be configured to be set for all symbols.

  If it is determined that the α data for the whole needs to be set (S3007: Yes), the process of S3008 is executed. In the process of S3008, the entire α data of each symbol is grasped and set (S3008). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no need to set the overall α data (S3007: No), the combination designation information is set (S3009). As the combination designation information, information obtained by combining the partial α data and the entire α data is set as transparent information.

  Next, it is determined whether it is a timing to reduce and display the symbol in the reduced display area PL2 of the third symbol display device 81 (S3010). If it is determined that it is the timing to reduce the symbol (S3010: Yes), a symbol reduction display process is executed (S3011). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the reduced display (S3010: No), the process ends.

  Next, the symbol reduction display processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the symbol reduction display processing (S3011).

  In the symbol reduction display processing (S3011), first, it is determined whether it is time to start reducing the symbol (third symbol) from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2 (S3101). Here, the timing at which the reduced display is started is the timing at which the fluctuation of the symbol is switched from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined that it is time to start the reduced display (S3101: Yes), the process of S3102 is executed. In the processing of S3102 to S3106, an initial setting processing for performing reduced display is executed. Specifically, in the process of S3102, the initial symbol sprite data (sprite data of the symbol to be reduced) is grasped (S3102). The coordinate data for specifying the place where the initial symbol sprite data is drawn is set (S3103).

  Initial setting of scale information is performed (S3104). Specifically, the scale information is set to an initial value “1”. As a result, the initial symbol sprite data is displayed on the display screen in the same size. A process for updating the parameter is executed (S3105). The value of the reduction counter is set to “0” which is the initial value (S3106). This reduction counter is a counter used when changing the scale information of the initial symbol sprite data, and is used for grasping the end timing of the stepwise reduction display.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reduced display start timing (S3101: No), it is determined whether it is the reduced display period (S3108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reduction counter is “30”. If the reduction counter is less than 30, it is determined that the display period is the reduction display period.

  When it is determined that the period is the reduced display period (S3108: Yes), the initial symbol sprite data is grasped (S3109). In this case, the initial symbol sprite data is the symbol data determined in the process of S2822 in the symbol determination process (FIG. 42, S2104).

  The coordinates for displaying the symbol are set (S3111). The value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the reduction counter (S3112). The scale information is updated (S3113). This scale information is set by 1-0.02 × Z (reduction counter value). Update of other parameter information is executed (S3114).

  In the case of this reduction period, the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is gradually reduced, and the reduced third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. Note that the initial symbol sprite data in the reduction period is a reach symbol. In the case of the double-reach display mode, a probable symbol is set as initial symbol sprite data.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not the reduction period (S3108: No), reduced symbol sprite data is grasped (S3115). The coordinates for displaying the symbol sprite data are set (S3116). In this case, coordinates corresponding to each symbol in the reduced display area PL2 are set. The scale information is set in the same manner as in S3113 (S3117). Update of other parameters is performed (S3118).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3202), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3201: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3203), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3202), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3202).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3301). If the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3301: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3302). In the process of S3302, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3302: Yes), the process proceeds to S3303. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3301: No), the process proceeds to S3303.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3303), and if there is an untransferred resident target image data (S3303: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3304), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3303, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3303: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3305), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 36 to 38) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 39 to 41) are performed instead of the simple command determination processing and the simple display setting processing. ) Is executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S3201: No in FIG. 46A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3203), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3203).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S2605) of the previously executed display setting processing (S2103). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3401). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S3402). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3402: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3403) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3404), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3405.

  In the process of S3402, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3402: No), the process of S3403 and S3404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. In the process of S3405, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3405), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S3405: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3406).

  In the process of S3406, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3406 (S3406: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3406: Yes), the process proceeds to S3407. Also, as a result of the processing in S3405, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3405: No), the processing shifts to S3407.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on (S3407). If the transfer start flag is on (S3407: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3408),
In the process of S3409, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3409). The determination in the process of S3409 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3409 (S3409: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3409, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3409: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3410). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3410, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3411), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2106), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 19 is generated (S3501). That is, in the process of S3501, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2104), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3502, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3503). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 35B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

<Process in Image Controller 237>
Next, basic processing executed by the image controller 237 will be described. The image controller 237 sets a register value based on a command transmitted from the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and creates drawing data in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list. The processing for outputting an image signal to the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing data created in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is executed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The process of creating drawing data is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). The process of outputting an image signal is executed by a display circuit (not shown) at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Next, the image data creation processing (S4200) executed by the image controller of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the image data creation processing (S4200) executed by the image controller. This image data creation processing (S4200) is based on the drawing list created in the drawing processing (S2106 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. To perform drawing (display output).

  It is determined whether all the drawing information specified by the set drawing list has been drawn (S4201). If it is determined that all the drawing information has been drawn (S4201: Yes), it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received (S4202). If it is determined that a new drawing list has not been received (S4202: No), the process of S4207 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a new drawing list has been received (S4202: Yes), a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed (S4203).

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is determined from the information included in the drawing list whether the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is created in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236b. Then, the grasped frame buffer is set as a drawing data creation target. In addition, the video decoder operates to determine whether or not there is a decode specification, and if there is a decode specification, to know the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred, and to decode the moving image data. Let it. Next, the process of S4205 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the drawing is not completed (S4201: No), the drawing list counter is updated (S4204). Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the process of S4205 is executed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, but may be configured to process a plurality of image data in one drawing process. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each of the processing times, and a configuration in which different numbers of image data are processed in each of the processing times of the drawing processing may be employed.

  In the process of S4205, a content comprehension process is executed (S4205). In this content comprehension processing (S4205), the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color pallet data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. Next, a writing process is performed (S4206). Next, the process of S4207 is executed.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether the output of the image signal for one frame is completed (S4207). If the processing has not been completed (S4207: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the processing has been completed (S4207: Yes), the V interrupt signal indicating that the output of the image signal for one frame has been completed (drawing of one frame has been completed) to the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Is output (S4208), and this process ends.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit to the third symbol display device 81 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is employed as described above, the output of the image signal is This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data one frame after the frame related to the output. Note that the display circuit has a selector circuit that alternately switches a frame buffer to be referred to each time the output of an image signal for one frame is completed. The frame buffer is restricted so as not to be an output target for outputting an image signal.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment, the horizontally long third symbols are arranged side by side on the horizontally elongated third symbol display device 81 and displayed in the reduced display area PL2, so that the display area in the short direction of the third symbol display device 81 is widened. Can be used.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 6B, a horizontally long third symbol is displayed on the horizontally elongated third symbol display device 81 in the reduced display area PL2 in the short direction of the third symbol. Thus, the area in the long direction of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used. Further, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used in a shape close to a square.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol is reduced from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2 at the timing of starting the reduced display, and the symbol is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The scale information of the symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is set to be small every predetermined period (for example, every 0.5 s), and the coordinates to be displayed are gradually reduced in accordance with the predetermined period. You may comprise so that it may set so that it may approach PL2. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player that the symbol is moved and displayed, and recognize the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of the symbol. Further, in addition to gradually reducing the pattern, the display frame may be displayed and moved to the reduced display area PL2 so as to be gradually reduced and displayed, or an arrow may be displayed so as to point to the reduced display area PL2. You may comprise so that it may display on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Further, the light effect may be gradually displayed toward the reduced display area PL2.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol data of the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the normal display area PL1. Apart from the symbol data of the third symbol, the symbol data of the third symbol dedicated to be displayed in the reduced display area PL1 may be set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. Since the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2 has a small display area, the number of pixels and the like can be reduced, and the display data of the third symbol can be reduced. Therefore, when the display of the third symbol is controlled in the reduced display area PL2, the control load in the drawing processing of the image controller 237 can be reduced. Therefore, the time for generating the display data can be shortened, and the inconvenience such as the processing failure that cannot be generated for the display data within the predetermined time can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the reduced display area PL2 is configured as a predetermined area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be. Further, the position and the size may be changed depending on the operation position of the driving device 800. With this configuration, it is possible to display the third symbol at a position and size that are easily viewable as appropriate according to the display mode, the movement of the driving device, and the like. Therefore, the lottery result can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the reduced display area PL2 may be provided not on the third symbol display device 81 but on another sub-display or the like. With this configuration, the player can more easily recognize the third symbol. Further, the degree of freedom in the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

<Another example of the first embodiment>
Another example of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 is first used until all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on. The case has been described in which an image (characters or symbols of “O” or “X”) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the image data stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. In the pachinko machine 10 according to another example of the first embodiment, symbol data dedicated to reduced display displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is set corresponding to a third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 shown in FIG. deep. Then, when the power is turned on, among the symbol data of the reduced symbol, three symbols (turtle), four symbols (shark), and a shell symbol (sub-symbol) are read out from the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 first, and used for resident use. It is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the video RAM 235.

  Next, until all the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the read reduced symbol data is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging three symbols in a horizontal line. Are displayed, and the display is repeatedly changed (display is switched in order).

  If it is a big hit, if it is a probability change big hit (big hit A), three symbols (turtles) are stopped and displayed on the left and right, and after reaching the reach display mode, three symbols (turtles) are stopped on the middle symbol. Notify the player of the probability change jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot B), four symbols (sharks) are stopped and displayed on the left and right, the reach display mode is set, and then four symbols (sharks) are displayed on the middle symbol, thereby giving a normal jackpot. To the player. In the case of a deviation determination result, if the display is a fluctuation display of less than 10 seconds, four symbols (shark) on the left and three symbols (turtle) are stopped and displayed on the right, and then four symbols (medium symbols) are displayed on the middle symbol. The shark), the three designs (turtle) and the shell design are stopped to notify that they have come off. Further, when the fluctuation time is, for example, 10 seconds or more, three symbols (turtle) or four symbols (shark) are stopped on the left and right, and as a reach display mode, three symbols different from the shell symbol or the reach symbol in the middle symbol ( By stopping and displaying the turtle) or the four symbols (shark), the user is notified of the departure.

  In this way, by using the symbols actually used and displaying the variable display that is displayed during the image transfer when the power is turned on, the player can confirm the same symbols as the normal variations. You can play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage that the player does not play the game until the image data is completely transferred.

  Further, by using the reduced symbol data as a simple image, it is not necessary to store data dedicated to the simple image, and the data amount of the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  Further, by using the reduced symbol data used in a normal game as a simple image, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the reduced symbol having a small number of pixels is first transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, small image data can be transferred first, and the transfer time can be shortened. Therefore, it takes time before the image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b when the power is turned on, and it is possible to suppress a problem that a game cannot be performed.

  Further, as another form different from the present embodiment, a probability change jackpot C composed of two rounds or the like is set, and the reduced symbol data to be transferred at power-on at the time of power-on is 3 symbols (turtle), 4 symbols (shark). ) In the case of a jackpot C as one symbol (octopus) and shellfish symbol, the symbols are stopped and displayed as three symbols (turtle), four symbols (shark), and one symbol (octopus) from the left symbol, and the symbol is the jackpot C. Naturally, it may be configured to notify the player of the fact. In this way, by transferring only the minimum reduced symbol data necessary for the notification of the game, such as the jackpot type, the transfer time of the image data required for the simplified image displayed at power-on can be shortened. Can be played even when the power is turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the required reduced symbol data among the reduced symbol data is configured to be transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b first, and the reduced symbol data is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. Although the display is configured to be displayed in the same size (actual size display) as that of the third design displayed in the normal display area PL1, the transferred reduced design is enlarged and displayed in the same size as the third design displayed in the normal display area PL1. May be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game closer to a normal game after turning on the power.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the symbol is a fish and shellfish, the background color of the third symbol display device 81 is also displayed in a simple image such as blue so that a game closer to a normal game is performed for the player. Can be made.

<Second embodiment>
<Regarding Display Mode in Second Embodiment>
Next, a display mode in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the state where the third symbol is displayed in the double reach display mode, it is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 in the reach display mode of the positive variation symbol. The configuration in which the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size has been described (see FIG. 7B). However, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, when the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 in a state where the third symbol is displayed in the double reach display mode, As shown in FIG. 10A, two types of symbols in the double reach display mode displayed in the normal display area PL1 are displayed on the reduced display line S1 of the reduced display area PL2.

  More specifically, eight symbols, which are normal symbols, are displayed with high transparency, and nine symbols are superimposed and displayed with a symbol having low transparency. By displaying in this manner, even if the third symbol is the reduced display area PL2 configured with a vertical width capable of displaying one symbol, a double-reach display mode of eight symbols and nine symbols is displayed. Can be determined. Therefore, even if the third symbol is hidden from the normal display area PL1 and displayed in a reduced size in the reduced display area PL2 to the player, the double reach display mode is maintained as before the reduced display. The state can be determined. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Also, when the third symbol is displayed in a superimposed manner, the symbol which is a symbol of the player's big hit is displayed by displaying the transparency of the symbol 8 which is a normal symbol with a high transparency and the transparency of the symbol 9 which is the variable symbol with a low transparency. The player can be notified of a symbol having a high degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the second embodiment, one of the two types of the double-reach display mode is displayed in a state of high transparency and displayed in a superimposed manner. This is informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to alternately display two types of symbols in the double reach display mode at regular intervals. In detail, one symbol is hidden and the other symbol is switched and displayed every two seconds or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player of the double reach display mode to the player. In addition, the switching cycle and the like may be set as appropriate, but by changing it in accordance with the scroll speed of the middle symbol in the reduced display area PL2, it is possible to easily know whether or not the combination will be a hit to the player. In detail, during the period when the winning combination is displayed on the middle symbol, the same symbol as the middle symbol is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol is displayed on the other symbols. By switching to another symbol at the timing of scrolling and switching and displaying the left symbol and the right symbol, it is possible to inform the player of whether or not the winning will be easier to understand.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the effect driven by the driving device 800 is executed in the double reach display mode, the process of reducing and displaying the symbol is executed. At that time, a configuration has been described in which one of the two symbols in the reach display in the double reach display mode is reduced and displayed. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the symbols are reduced and displayed in the double reach display mode, the two reach symbols are switched and displayed at predetermined intervals. This is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  Next, a symbol reduction process 2 (S3120), which is one of the symbol calculation processes (FIG. 44, S2903) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the symbol reduction display processing 2 (S3120).

  In the symbol reduction display process 2 (FIG. 50, S3120), first, it is determined whether the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the double reach display mode (S3121). When it is determined that the display mode is the double-reach display mode (S3121: Yes), both the symbol sprite data of the reach symbols constituting the double-reach display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are grasped. (S3122). The coordinates of the symbol to be reduced and displayed are set (S3123). As the coordinates set here, (x, y) data of the reduced display area PL2 is set as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, both symbols in the double reach display mode are displayed in the reduced display area PL2 at the same coordinates. Therefore, the same left and right coordinates are set for both symbols as the coordinates set in the process of S3123.

  Next, scale information of the symbol to be reduced is set (S3124). Update of parameters required for other symbol display is executed (S3125). In the present embodiment, the size of the symbol to be reduced and displayed is set to be 1/8 the size of the symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1. The size of the symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is not particularly limited to this size, but depends on the size of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the size of the reduced display area PL2, and the like. It may be determined appropriately.

  It is determined whether it is the symbol switching period (S3126). The determination as to whether this is the symbol switching period is made by measuring the time from the start of the reduced display of the symbol and switching the symbol switching period every three seconds. In other words, for three seconds after it is determined that the symbol switching period is set (S3126: Yes), it is determined that the symbol switching period is set. Thereafter, it is determined that it is not the symbol switching period for 3 seconds. Here, it is measured by a timer (not shown), and it is determined whether or not the period is every three seconds.

  In the process of S3126, when it is determined that it is the symbol switching period (S3126: Yes), the whole α data of the lower numbered symbol among the reach symbols is set to be transparent (S3127). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is outside the symbol switching period (S3126: No), the α data for the whole of the symbol with the larger number among the reach symbols is set to be transparent (S3128). Here, the overall α data is data for setting the transparency of the entire symbol as described above. When the state is set to the completely transparent state (transparent), the α data for the whole is set to “0”. Further, the α data for the whole of the symbol which is not set to be transparent is set to “1”. Thereafter, the reduced display designation information is stored (S3129).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3121, when it is determined that the mode is not the double reach display mode (S3121: No), the symbol sprite data of the reach symbol is grasped (S3130). The coordinates of the reduced display area PL2 for displaying the symbol are set (S3131). Reduction scale information to be set when the symbol is displayed in a reduced size is set (S3132). Updating of parameters required for displaying other symbols is executed (S3133). Note that the processes in S3131 to S3133 are set in the same manner as in S3123 and S3125 described above. After that, the process of S3129 is executed.

  With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 10A, the “8” symbol and the “9” symbol are respectively displayed at the same coordinates in the reduced display area PL2, so that the symbols are displayed at positions overlapping each other. In this case, if both are displayed in the opaque state, it becomes difficult for the players to identify each other's symbols. However, as in the configuration of the second embodiment, every predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) Each of the patterns is alternately set to be in the completely transparent state, so that the symbols can be easily identified. Therefore, even if the symbol is displayed in a reduced size, it can be easily recognized that the double reach display mode before the reduced display is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is uneasy with the game.

  In the present embodiment, the respective symbols are alternately made to be in a completely transparent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured easily.

  Further, the configuration is such that the symbols are made to be in a completely transparent state alternately at predetermined time intervals, but may be configured to be switched at random times or in accordance with the movement of the central variable symbol. At this time, when the symbol in the center is the same as one of the reach symbols, by setting the symbol as a non-transparent symbol, the player can have a high expectation of a big hit.

<Third embodiment>
<Display Mode in Third Embodiment>
Next, a display mode in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, when the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2 in the state of being displayed in the double reach display mode as shown in FIG. 7A, as shown in FIG. 10B. Are displayed in the reduced display area PL2, indicating that the two types of symbols displayed in the double reach display mode have been merged.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fusion symbol is displayed in which the left half of the eight symbols and the right half of the nine symbols are in contact with each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player of the double reach display mode to the player. Therefore, even if the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 and is not displayed, the player can recognize that the special symbol is being drawn and play the game with confidence. be able to. In the present embodiment, as an example of the fusion symbol, an example of a symbol in which each of the symbols is combined by half is shown. Specifically, by setting a symbol such as a family crest or a temporary symbol different from a normal symbol as a fusion symbol, it is possible to easily notify the player that the symbol is a temporary symbol.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is switched from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2, the driving device 800 is driven to the driving position to cover a part of the normal display area PL1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special display mode in which the third symbol is not displayed in the normal display area PL1 even when the driving device 800 does not drive to the driving position or when the driving device 800 is not provided. For example, when displaying a character, displaying a blackout that does not display anything, displaying an effect (displaying only light), and the like, the third symbol or a temporary substitute for the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. By displaying the symbol in a reduced size, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing so that it is easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the effect driven by the driving device 800 is executed in the double reach display mode, the process of reducing and displaying the symbol is executed. At that time, a configuration has been described in which one of the two symbols in the reach display in the double reach display mode is reduced and displayed. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in the case of the double-reach display mode, when the symbols are displayed in a reduced size, two reach symbols are respectively displayed by half as shown in FIG. The configuration is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration is configured to be combined and displayed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  Next, a symbol reduction process 3 (S3140), which is one of the symbol calculation processes (FIG. 44, S2903) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. Reference numeral 51 is a flowchart showing the symbol reduction display process 3 (S3140).

  In the symbol reduction process 3 (FIG. 51, S3140) in the third embodiment, each of the processes from S3126 to S3128 is the same as the symbol reduction process 2 (FIG. 50, S3120) in the second embodiment described above in S3146. Has been changed to In the processes in S3121 to S3125, S3129, and S3130 to S3133, the same processes as those in S3141 to S3145, S3147, and S3148 to S3151 are executed. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted.

  In the process of S3145 in FIG. 51, if the process of updating other parameters is performed, then the process of S3146 is performed. In the process of S3146, the α data for the right half of the symbol with the small number among the reach symbols is set to “0” indicating transparency which is a completely transparent state, and the α data for the left half of the symbol with the large number is set to “0”. It is set to "0" indicating transparency, which is a completely transparent state (S3146).

  By executing the process of S3146 in this manner, as shown in FIG. 10B, the symbols indicating the symbols "8" and "9" are displayed in the reduced display area PL2 at the same coordinates. The right half (right half from the center of the symbol) of the smaller numbered "8" symbol and the left half of the "9" symbol (the left half from the center of the symbol) are set to be completely transparent. Thus, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), it is possible to display a symbol in which each of the eight symbols and the nine symbols is fused in half. Therefore, the player can display both symbols in the double reach display mode in the same display space as in the single reach display mode so that the player can recognize each of the symbols even when the symbols are displayed in a reduced size. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the state of the double reach display mode before the reduced display of the symbol is continuously maintained after the reduced display. As a result, a problem in which the player feels uneasy about the game can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, each of the symbols is set to be in a completely transparent state by half so that the respective symbols are displayed so as to be fused with each other. In this case, the design may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load when the symbols are displayed in a reduced size.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the respective symbols displayed in the double-reach display mode are configured to be combined and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a special symbol indicating the double-reach display mode (for example, The design of the character having the plate of “double reach” may be displayed in the same size (excluding the sub-design) as other designs. In this case, if the symbol scroll-displayed at the center is changed to a special symbol such as a symbol only such as "big hit" or "losing", the player can be informed easily. Furthermore, if the symbol in the center is changed to a special symbol such as “probably big hit” or “normal big hit” that can determine the type of big hit, the player can more maintain the expectation of the certain big hit. The exclusive design may be constituted by a design such as a family crest, for example.

<Fourth embodiment>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the effect driven by the driving device 800 is executed, the process of reducing and displaying the symbols is executed. At this time, the configuration has been described in which the scale information of the symbol sprite data displayed in the normal display area PL2 is reduced and set so as to be reduced. However, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that when a symbol is reduced and displayed, the symbol is reduced and displayed based on symbol sprite data dedicated to reduced display. This is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so that its illustration and description are omitted.

  Next, the symbol calculation process 2 (S3020), which is one of the task processes (S2105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the symbol calculation process 2 (S3020).

  In the symbol calculation process 2 (FIG. 52, S3020), first, it is determined whether or not a symbol is being displayed in a reduced display area PL2 in a reduced display period (S3021). If it is determined that the period is for displaying the symbol in the normal display area PL1 (S3021: No), the symbol sprite data of the symbol to be displayed is grasped (S3022). Here, symbol sprite data for all symbol columns displayed in the normal display area PL1 is grasped. Next, the coordinates and scale information of each symbol to be displayed are grasped (S3023), and a process of updating the parameters of each symbol sprite data is executed (S3024). Note that when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) in the normal display area PL1, the symbols are scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction. It is set based on the set display data table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3021 that the display is in the reduced display period (S3021: Yes), the symbol sprite data for reduced display is grasped (S3025). The coordinates and scale information (size) of each symbol to be displayed are grasped (S3026). The parameters of the symbol sprite data for each reduced display are updated (S30267). Here, when a symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2, it is set to the coordinates for displaying the symbol set by the display data table so that the central symbol displayed in the central column is scrolled vertically. ing.

  It is to be noted that in the design sprite data for reduced display, design sprite data dedicated to reduced display is set in the character ROM 234 in advance corresponding to each of the symbols (a) to (i) shown in FIG. With this configuration, when a symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is displayed in a reduced size, there is a problem that the symbol is broken and the visibility is reduced depending on the reduction ratio. With such a configuration, such a problem can be suppressed. In such a case, the design sprite data dedicated to reduction is set in advance in a size to be displayed in the reduced display area PL2, and is not set to be reduced by the scale information.

  It is determined whether or not the symbol is displayed at the position where the partial display of the symbol is executed (S3028). Here, the state where the partial display of the symbol is executed is, if the symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, if there is a symbol displayed outside the normal display area PL1. The symbols must be displayed in a completely transparent state. When a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction, so that the symbol in the horizontal direction (for example, half of the symbol in the horizontal direction) is displayed in a completely transparent state. On the other hand, when the reduced display is set, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, among the symbols displayed in the reduced display area PL2, the central symbol in the central row scrolls vertically. Therefore, depending on the coordinates (position) where the symbol is displayed, a part of the symbol displayed outside the reduced display area PL2 is displayed in a completely transparent state. When the display is reduced, as shown in FIG. 8A or 8C, a part of the design in the vertical direction (for example, the upper half) is displayed in a completely transparent state.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the process of S3028, when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the partial display of the symbol (S3028: Yes), it is determined whether the symbol is in the reduced display period in which the symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. (S3029). If it is determined that it is during the reduced display period (S3029: Yes), the α data for the partial portion in the vertical direction is grasped (S3030). On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol display period is being displayed in the normal display area PL1 (S3029: No), the horizontal partial α data is set (S3031). Here, when a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is horizontally scrolled and displayed in a fluctuating manner, so that the horizontal area where the symbol is displayed outside the normal display area PL1 is in a completely transparent state. Is displayed.

  It is determined whether it is necessary to set the entire α data (S3032). Here, it is determined whether it is necessary to display the entire symbol in a transparent state. In the case where the entire symbol is displayed in a completely transparent state, it is set when it is necessary to show the background on the back side of the symbol as an effect. Further, even during the high-speed fluctuation display, the whole α data is set because the symbols need to be transparently displayed. As a result, the symbols can be displayed collectively in the transmission state, and the load in the transmission control can be reduced. Further, the α data for the whole is configured to be set for each symbol, but may be configured to be set for all symbols.

  If it is determined that the α data for the whole needs to be set, the process of S3033 is executed. In the process of S3033, the entire α data of each symbol is grasped and set (S3033). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no need to set the overall α data (S3032: No), the combination designation information is set (S3034). As the combination designation information, information obtained by combining the partial α data and the entire α data is set as transparent information.

  As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when a symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the reduced display area PL2, the symbol is displayed in a dedicated symbol. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the design becomes difficult to see due to deformation or the like. Therefore, it is possible to display a symbol that is easy for the player to see.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a symbol dedicated to reduced display is set corresponding to a symbol to be displayed in the normal display area PL1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may be comprised so that a special design may be respectively set. With this configuration, the number of types of symbols for reduced display can be reduced, and the data amount of the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, it can be configured with a small capacity, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  It is to be noted that the configurations described in the first to fourth embodiments may be combined with each other.

  In the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided. Alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be performed is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to reside in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed. However, by using the configuration described in the above embodiment, the display control device 114 can display an image at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored in the boot program. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed by writing the image data.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The content may be divided and the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten while the power is turned on and the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are maintained is not limited to this. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You may leave. Further, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 and The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 39). The warning image setting process (refer to FIG. 43) may be executed when it is determined that a warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display controller 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Accordingly, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image which notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address corresponding to the address in which the time during which the image for the frame is displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the rendering process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be rendered based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded is displayed. May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 transmits the sound display controller 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case where the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a fluctuation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where the demonstration effect changes the back image and stops and displays the third symbol including the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol including a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. Transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to determine whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The image data corresponding to the two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the main control of the reserved ball count command each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). Although the case where the signal is transmitted from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-reservation command from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c increases in the main controller 110. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance port 64 may be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as a variety of gaming machines such as a game machine such as an arepachi, a sparrow ball, and a so-called pachinko machine combined with a slot machine.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols is provided, and is not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.
<Feature A group>
Display means having a display screen, and display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner and then stopping and displaying a plurality of identification images in a display manner showing a lottery result. In a gaming machine, at least one of the plurality of identification images is configured to be long on one side, and the display control means moves the identification image in a first area of the display screen during a first period. Display in the second period, which is smaller than the first region on the display screen, in the second period, the identification image is displayed side by side in the short direction of the long identification image on one side. A gaming machine A1 having display control means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, after a dynamic display is performed on a display unit having a display screen in a predetermined dynamic display mode, a plurality of long identification images are stopped and displayed by a display control unit in a display mode indicating a lottery result. Is done. In the display control means, the identification image is dynamically displayed by the display control means in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and in the area smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. In a certain second area, identification images are displayed side by side by the change display control means in the short direction of the long identification image on one side. Thus, the area in which the identification image is displayed can be changed according to the predetermined period. In addition, by displaying long symbols on one side in the short direction, the display area can be prevented from being occupied greatly in the long direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played using the display screen more effectively.

In the gaming machine A1, the display screen of the display unit is configured to have a long display screen on one side, and the identification image that is long on one side is configured to be long in the same direction as the display screen. A gaming machine A2 characterized by having
According to the gaming machine A2, one of the display means is constituted by a long display screen. The identification image is configured to be long in the same direction as the display screen. Therefore, by displaying the identification images side by side in the short direction, there is an effect that the long direction of the display screen can be effectively used.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, during the second period, driving means capable of driving to a driving position covering at least a part of the front surface side of the first region is provided, and the second region is provided with the driving unit. The gaming machine A3, wherein the game device A3 is set outside the first area covered by the driving device even when the device is driven to the driving position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 and A2. That is, during the second period, at least a part of the front surface side of the first region is covered by driving the driving unit to the driving position. Even when the driving means is driven to the driving position, the second area is set outside the first area covered by the driving means. Thus, even when the display of the identification image is hindered by the driving unit that drives to the front side of the display screen, the identification image can be moved to an area where the visibility can be prevented from being hindered by the driving unit and displayed. Therefore, even if the player makes the effect by the driving means on the front side of the display means, the identification image is displayed at a position visible to the player, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the display control means displays a display effect different from the identification image in at least a part of the first area during the second period. Machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, a display effect different from the identification image is displayed by the display control means in at least a part of the first area in the second period willow. By effectively using a display area other than the second area and performing a novel effect different from that in a normal case, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the change display control unit may switch the area for displaying the identification image from the first area to the second area or the second area to the first area. A gaming machine A5 for displaying a switching notification display indicating that a region is switched from a first region to the second region.

  In the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the area for displaying the identification image is switched from the first area to the second area or from the second area to the first area, the switching notification display indicating that the area is switched from the first area to the second area is changed display control. Displayed by means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the identification image is lost when the display area of the identification image is switched.

  In the gaming machine A5, the switching notification display is a process image in which the area is reduced from the first area to the second area, which is reduced and displayed every time the image is updated, or the second area is displayed from the second area. A gaming machine A6 comprising a process image in which a region is enlarged to one region.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A5. That is, a process in which the region is reduced from the first region to the second region, which is displayed in a reduced size each time the image is updated, or a process in which the region is expanded from the second region to the first region A switching notification display is configured by an image. Therefore, the switching of the display area of the identification image can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can more easily recognize that the identification image is displayed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the display effect displayed during the second period is a display effect selecting means for selecting one display effect from a plurality of display effects, and a display selected by the display effect selecting means. A gaming machine A7, comprising: a second area determination unit that determines at least one of the size and the position of the second area based on the effect.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6. That is, one of the display effects displayed during the second period is selected from the plurality of display effects by the display effect selecting means. Based on the display effect selected by the display effect selecting means, at least one of the size and the position of the second area is determined by the second area determining means. Thus, the size of the second area can be changed in accordance with the display effect, and the display effect can be displayed in the optimal display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be displayed more easily for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7, at least one of the size and the position of the second area is changed in accordance with the driving of the driving means, so that the second area is formed in an area other than the area covered by the driving means. A gaming machine A8 having a second area changing means for changing an area.

According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A3 to A7. That is, by changing at least one of the size and the position of the second area in accordance with the driving of the driving means, the second area is changed to an area other than the area covered by the driving means by the second area changing means. . Therefore, the degree of freedom can be increased depending on the position where the driving unit is driven. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be shown driving various driving means.
<Characteristic B group>
Display means having a display screen, and display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner and then stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result, In a gaming machine that notifies a lottery result of a game by combining some of the identification images, the display control means stops one of the identification image combinations other than the identification image among combinations of identification images indicating a hit. A dynamic display mode display control means for displaying and displaying the remaining one identification image in a special dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the remaining one identification image; Display control means for dynamically displaying the dynamic display mode, and for the second period, dynamically displaying the special dynamic display mode in a second area of the display screen smaller than the first area. Wherein the dynamic display mode display means displays the remaining one identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode in a predetermined direction on the display screen of the display means during the first period. A gaming machine B1 comprising display direction switching means for performing dynamic display and switching to a dynamic display in a direction different from the predetermined direction for the second period.

  According to the gaming machine B1, after the dynamic display on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. The lottery result is notified by combining some of the different identification images. Of the combinations of identification images that indicate a hit, one other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display mode display control unit of the display control unit. In the first period, the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in the first area of the display screen by the change display control unit of the display control unit. Also, during the second period, the special dynamic display mode is displayed by the switching unit of the display control unit in the second area smaller than the first area. The remaining one identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen during the first period, and moves in a direction different from the predetermined direction during the second period. The display is switched by the display direction switching means of the dynamic display mode display means. Thereby, when the identification image is displayed in the second area smaller than the first area, the case where the image is dynamically displayed in the first area and the dynamic display direction of the remaining one symbol in the special dynamic display mode Is changed, the player's attention can be directed to the identification image even when the display area is switched to a small area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the identification image from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, the display screen of the display means has a rectangular display area that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction, and the identification image is an image that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction similar to the display area. Wherein the dynamic display mode display means dynamically displays the identification image in a longitudinal direction of the display area during the first period, and the display direction switching means comprises A game machine B2 for switching the dynamic display of the identification image from a direction to a short direction.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the display screen of the display means is formed of a rectangular display area that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction. The identification image is composed of an image that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction, similar to the display area. In the first period, the identification image is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display mode display means in the longitudinal direction of the display area. The dynamic display of the identification image is switched from the long direction to the short direction of the display area by the display direction switching means. Thus, in the first period, the area in which the identification image is displayed is smaller in the second period than in the first period, so that the identification image is shorter than in the case where the design is dynamically displayed in the long direction of the identification image. By dynamically displaying in the direction, even in a display area for one symbol, the whole of the identification image can be easily understood even if it is dynamically displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the identification image. .

  In the gaming machine B2, in the first period, the identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in an area in which two or more of the identification images can move in a long direction, In the second period, the identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode is characterized in that less than 2 identification images are dynamically displayed in an area movable in a long direction. Gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, in the first period, the identification image is dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode in the long direction in an area where two or more identification images can move in the long direction. In the second period, the identification images are dynamically displayed in a special dynamic display mode in an area where less than two identification images can move in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, in the first period, it is possible to make the player recognize that the identification image is dynamically displayed by effectively using the area movable in the long direction. In the second period, the display area of the identification image in the second period can be made smaller by configuring the area in which less than two identification images can be moved in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a region in which an image other than the identification image can be displayed in the second period can be configured to be wide.
<Characteristic C group>
Display means having a display screen, and display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner and then stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result, In a gaming machine that notifies a lottery result of a game by combining some of the identification images, the display control means may move the identification image in a first area of the display screen during a first period. Change display control means for displaying the identification image in the second area which is smaller than the first area of the display screen if the second image is in the second period; A dynamic display mode display control means for stopping and displaying other than the one of the identification images in the combination and displaying the remaining one of the identification images in a special dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the other identification image; The target display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which a portion other than one identification image is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating one hit, and a combination other than one identification image in a combination indicating a plurality of hits. The multi-special dynamic display mode in which the display is stopped is set, and the identification images displayed in the multi-special dynamic display mode are individually displayed in different areas during the first period. In the gaming machine C1, during the second period, different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed in the same area, and one remaining identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area.

  According to the gaming machine C1, after the dynamic display on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. The display control means dynamically displays the identification image in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and the second area which is smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. The identification image is displayed by the change display control means. Dynamic display mode display control of the display control means in a special dynamic display mode in which a display other than one identification image among the combinations of identification images indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed. Displayed by means. The special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which one of the combinations indicating one hit is stopped and displayed other than one identification image, and a combination other than one identification image among the combinations indicating a plurality of hits. The double special dynamic display mode in which the display is stopped is set. Each identification image displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode is individually displayed in a different area during the first period, and the different identification images stopped and displayed in the same area during the second period. Then, the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area. Accordingly, even in the multiple special dynamic display mode, the display space of the identification image displayed in the second area can be configured to be smaller in a state where each of the identification images can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to secure a larger area in which an image other than the identification image can be displayed in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be presented with an effect having an impact different from the normal time in the second period.

  In the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, the identification images other than one identification image among the different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed with increased transparency. A gaming machine C2, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special display mode displayed during the second period, the transparency of the identification images other than the one identification image among the different identification images stopped and displayed is reduced. Since the display is made higher, even when two identification images are displayed in an overlapping manner, there is an effect that each identification image can be more easily viewed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is switched and displayed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is satisfied with a predetermined condition. Since the display is switched each time the display is performed, the plurality of identification images can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner in the area where one identification image is displayed.

  In the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, an alternative image that can identify the type of the identification image stopped and displayed during the first period is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine C4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, an alternative that can identify the type of the identification image stopped and displayed during the first period. Since the image is stopped and displayed, the display space can be made smaller.
<Feature D group>
Display means having a display screen, display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner, and then stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result, and for a predetermined period from power-on. And a temporary display control means for displaying a temporary identification image in place of the identification image, wherein the display control means includes a temporary display control means for displaying the temporary identification image in a first area of the display screen during a first period. Changing display control means for dynamically displaying the identification image in a second area, which is smaller than the first area of the display screen, during the second period. The identification image is displayed in the first display area based on the normal identification image data, and is displayed in the second display area based on reduced identification image data smaller than the normal identification image data. Reduced identification image In at least configured, the temporary display control means, on the basis of the reduced identification image data, the gaming machine wherein said is for displaying the temporary identification image D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, after the dynamic display on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. A temporary identification image replacing the identification image is displayed by the temporary display control means for a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The display control means dynamically displays the identification image in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and displays the identification image in an area smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. The identification image is dynamically displayed in a certain second area by the change display control means. The identification image includes a normal identification image displayed in the first display area based on the normal identification image data, and a reduced identification image displayed in the second display area based on the reduced identification image data smaller than the normal identification image data. At least. The temporary identification image is displayed by the temporary display control means based on the reduced identification image data. Thus, for a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the temporary identification image can be displayed based on the reduced identification image data having a small data amount. Therefore, the lottery game can be executed in a shorter period after the power is turned on. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more efficiently.

  In the gaming machine D1, a normal reading unit that reads predetermined display data necessary for displaying a display mode on the display screen based on that the gaming machine is powered on, A gaming machine D2, further comprising: a pre-reading unit that reads out the reduced image data beforehand, and wherein the predetermined period includes a period until the normal reading unit completes reading.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, predetermined display data necessary for displaying the display mode on the display screen is read by the normal reading means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine. The reduced image data is read by the pre-reading means before the normal reading means. A predetermined period is constituted by a period until the reading unit normally completes reading. Thereby, even before display data necessary for displaying the display mode on the display screen is read, the game can be played by displaying the reduced image. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result can be notified at an early timing after the player turns on the gaming machine by using the identification image in which the lottery result is easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine D2, the normal identification image and the reduced identification image each include a plurality of types of identification images corresponding to each other in a pair, and the advance reading unit reads at least one of the reduced identification images. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, a normal identification image and a reduced identification image are composed of a plurality of types of identification images each corresponding to one pair. At least one of the reduced identification images is read by the pre-reading means. Therefore, the time required for the pre-reading means to read the reduced symbol can be reduced, and the period from when the power is turned on to when the game can be started can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the temporary display control means dynamically enlarges and displays the reduced identification image.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the reduced identification image is enlarged and dynamically displayed by the temporary display control means, so that the display data necessary for the game is not read out. Even if there is, there is an effect that the identification image can be displayed large and the lottery result can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, when the lottery result is a hit, the game machine has a privilege game giving means for giving either a normal jackpot or a special jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the normal jackpot. The display control means, when the bonus game is provided by the bonus game providing means, stops and displays a normal jackpot identification image indicating that a normal jackpot is provided, out of the identification images, When the special jackpot is given by the giving means, the special jackpot identification image indicating that the special jackpot is given is stopped and displayed in the identification images, and the preliminary reading means is the normal jackpot. At least one reduced identification image corresponding to each of the identification image and the special jackpot identification image is read out. Game machine D5 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, if the lottery result is a hit, one of the normal jackpot and the special jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the normal jackpot is given to the privilege game giving means. Is given by When the bonus jackpot is provided by the bonus game providing means, the normal jackpot identification image indicating that the normal jackpot is provided is stopped and displayed in the identification image, and the special jackpot is provided by the bonus game providing means. In the identification image, a special jackpot identification image indicating that a special jackpot is given is stopped and displayed by the display control means. At least one reduced identification image corresponding to each of the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image is read by the pre-reading means.

  In this way, even if one of the normal jackpot and the special jackpot is won before the predetermined display data is read out, the player is notified based on the reduced identification image of which one of the jackpots was won. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result can be notified to the player more easily.

In the gaming machine D5, the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image are configured by combining and displaying a plurality of the same type of identification images, respectively.
The gaming machine D6, wherein the pre-reading means reads at least one identification image constituting the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image.

According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5. That is, the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image are displayed by combining a plurality of the same types of identification images. At least one identification image that constitutes the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image is respectively read by the pre-reading means. As a result, the amount of data read by the pre-reading means can be reduced, and the time required until the game starts can be reduced.
<Feature E group>
A gaming machine comprising: a display unit having a display screen; and a display control unit that dynamically displays on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and then stops and displays the identification image in a display mode showing a lottery result. Wherein the display control means comprises: a first area and a simultaneous display control means for dynamically displaying an identification image indicating a lottery result of a similar game in a second area different from the first area; If there is, the identification image displayed in the first area is displayed so as to be visually recognizable, and the identification image displayed in the second area is dynamically displayed in a transparent display mode that is difficult to visually recognize. Visual recognition switching means for displaying the identification image displayed in the first area in the transparent display mode, and displaying the identification image displayed in the second area so as to be visually recognizable. Gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, after dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control means in a display manner showing the lottery result. In the display control means, in the first area and a second area different from the first area, an identification image indicating a similar game lottery result is dynamically displayed by the simultaneous display control means. In the first period, the identification image displayed in the first area is displayed so as to be visible, and the identification image displayed in the second area is dynamically displayed in a transparent display mode that is difficult to view. The identification image displayed in the first area is displayed in the transparent display mode, and the identification image displayed in the second area is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the visual switching unit. This makes it possible to switch the display of the identification image between the first area and the second area by switching whether the identification image is visible or difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for switching to the display area of the identification image can be reduced.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a dynamic display of an identification information sequence composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, followed by a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device (display control means)
S2903 Change display control means S3010 Display direction switching means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, performs determination in accordance with the winning of game ball into the starter hole, the Starring unloading in accordance with the discrimination result, a pachinko machine to be displayed on the LCD screen are known. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .

JP 2011-125416 A

In this type of pachinko machine, there is a possibility that the display area for displaying the determination result may be limited depending on the effect performed .

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively utilizing a display area.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a display unit having a display area and a plurality of combinations of dynamically displaying on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then displaying a determination result. Display control means for stopping and displaying the identification symbol, and a privilege that can provide a benefit that is advantageous to the player when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination that is a combination for indicating the specific determination result. And a display area of the display unit, on which the plurality of identification symbols are displayed, is configured to be long on one side, and the display control unit dynamically displays the identification symbol of 1. In this state, the remaining symbols can be displayed in a multiple reach display mode in which stop display or temporary stop display is performed so that the remaining symbols can be any combination of the two or more specific combinations. , And the if the first period, the dynamic display by the identification symbols in the predetermined dynamic display mode in the first region of the display region, if the second period, the first of said display region those having a change display control means for displaying the special symbols corresponding to hand the identification symbols in the second region is an area smaller than the area, the gaming machine, select the display effect of 1 from a plurality of display effect Display effect selecting means, and a short second area in which a plurality of the special symbols can be displayed side by side along a short direction of the display area in accordance with the display effect selected by the display effect selecting means. And a second area determining means capable of determining, as the second area, a long second area in which the plurality of special symbols can be arranged and displayed along a long direction of the display area. And before the first period. When the second period is reached in a state where the identification symbol is displayed in the multiple reach display mode, the special symbol corresponding to each of the specific combinations displayed in the multiple reach display mode overlaps. At the display position, one special symbol is displayed by being alternately switched between a mode in which the special symbol is more easily recognized than the other special symbol and a mode in which the other special symbol is more easily recognized than the one special symbol. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that each of the specific combinations can be indicated .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, after a display means having a display area and a dynamic display on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode, a plurality of identification symbols are stopped in a combination for indicating a determination result. Display control means for displaying, when the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific combination which is a combination for indicating the specific determination result, privilege providing means capable of providing a benefit that is advantageous to the player, The display area of the display means on which the plurality of identification symbols are displayed is configured to be long on one side, and the display control means remains in a state in which one identification symbol is dynamically displayed. Can be displayed in a multiple reach display mode in which stop display or temporary stop display is possible so that the identification symbol can be any one of two or more specific combinations different from each other. Then, in the first area of the display area, the identification symbol is dynamically displayed in the predetermined dynamic display mode, and during the second period, the area is smaller than the first area of the display area. In the second area, has a change display control means for displaying a special symbol corresponding to the identification symbol, the gaming machine, display effect selection means for selecting one of the display effects from a plurality of display effects, A short second area that allows a plurality of the special symbols to be displayed side by side along the short direction of the display area in accordance with the display effect selected by the display effect selection unit, and a length of the display area. And a second area determining means capable of determining a long second area capable of displaying the plurality of special symbols side by side along a shaku direction as the second area, wherein the first period In the multiple reach display mode In the state where the identification symbol is displayed, when the second period is reached, at the display position where the special symbol corresponding to each of the specific combinations displayed in the multiple reach display mode overlaps, The mode in which one of the special symbols is easier to see than the other special symbols and the mode in which the other special symbols are easier to see than the one special symbol are alternately switched and displayed. The information is provided so as to suggest that each of the specific combinations can be obtained.

Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played by effectively using the display area.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which showed the display area at the time of displaying a 3rd symbol on the 3rd symbol display device of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure in another example of 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the display area when displaying the 3rd design on the 3 design display. (A) is a figure showing an example of a double reach display mode displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is an example of a case where the third symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area. FIG. (A)-(b) is a figure which showed an example when the 3rd symbol was scroll-displayed in the reduced display area in time series. (A) is a figure showing an example of a single-reach display mode displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is an example of a case where the third symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a case where a third symbol is displayed in a reduced display area of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, and (b) is a reduced display of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example when a third symbol is displayed in an area. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter C2 and a big hit type in a special symbol, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in a normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram explaining a third symbol set in a display data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically about the content of a 3rd symbol about an example of the display data table when a 3rd symbol is reduced and displayed in a reduced display area. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol change start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a task process executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol calculation process which is one process of the task process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol reduction display process which is one process of the symbol calculation process performed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an image data creation process executed by an image controller in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol reduction display process 2 which is one process of the symbol calculation process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol reduction display process 3 which is one process of the symbol calculation process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed symbol operation processing 2 which is one processing of task processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 4th embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. Note that the inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and has a window portion 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is provided on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible through the glass unit 16 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 11), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player to change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or to change the effect of the super reach, for example. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the present pachinko machine 10, three stages of a "city stage", an "empty stage", and an "island stage" are provided. There are two stages. Various effects, such as a variable effect and a reach effect, which are performed in accordance with the ball entry (start winning prize) into the first entrance 64 described later are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Have been. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “the empty stage” → "Island stage" → "City stage" → ... repeatedly. Immediately after the power is turned on, the “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of a super-reach effect mode during the normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and when the normal reach is advanced to the super reach. When the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the effect at the time of the super reach is changed.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and capable of displaying during the payout of award balls and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes in response to the change, so that the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball on the front. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 11) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first symbol) is selected when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Lottery). In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first entrance opening 64, it is determined whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined. When the special symbol hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls are won). ) Release and the release is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls win in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpots, "Big Jackpot A" and "Big Jackpot B". (Game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the first symbol display device 37 starts to display the variation of the special symbol, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds), The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entrance port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed in the first symbol display. This is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the next special symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started. Note that a special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67, it is determined whether the symbol is a hit or not. When a normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. State. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, a lottery of a special symbol is easily performed.

  Also, when the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, or the like) elapses, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. And at the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of special symbols, "big hit A" and "big hit B", are provided.

  In the case of "big hit A" and "big hit B", both are in the special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and then, as the added value after the big hit is "big hit A", the next big hit is Until that time, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol is being changed). On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the time of the ordinary symbol is reduced until the lottery is executed (until the change of the special symbol is started) 100 times after the end of the big hit.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during the probable change of the special symbol). In other words, the special game state (16R jackpot) ) Is the state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, the case where the special symbol is not in the high probability state is referred to as the special symbol low probability state, which is a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol jackpot probability is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time reduction state” (medium symbol time reduction) refers to a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "normal symbol time reduction state", it is called "normal symbol normal state", which means that the normal symbol hit probability is normal state, that is, the hit probability is lower than during normal time .

  As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probable change period of the special symbol are common, and according to the type of the jackpot, `` the time reduction of the ordinary symbol '' The period of “state” is changed. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Also, for example, instead of changing the period during which the “normal symbol time saving state” is set according to the type of the jackpot, a time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or one time The number of times the electric accessory is opened at the time of the normal symbol may be changed. Also, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot, the “special symbol high probability state” and the “normal symbol time reduction state” are set, but after the “special symbol high probability state” ends, the “normal symbol time reduction state” ".

  In the pachinko machine 10, when an initial setting is performed by turning on a power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “low probability state of special symbol”. Thereafter, when the special symbol hits, the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state” and to the “normal symbol time reduction state”.

  A first design in which a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area in front view. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display a variation by displaying a lighting state to indicate whether or not a lottery of a special symbol, which is performed in accordance with the ball entry (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64, is performed, or the variation is performed. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) according to the result of the lottery of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a change is not executed among the balls inserted into the first entrance 64. The number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being fluctuated on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to four times. The number of retained balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that the ball in the 1st ball entrance 64 might be suspended up to four times, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, but three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and the various game states of the pachinko machine 10 (the high probability state of the special symbol) can be realized with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. Or, during normal working hours, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicates the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) if the jackpot is a jackpot. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) by using the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right. Columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The corresponding decorative display is performed. In addition, you may make it comprise the 3rd symbol display device 81 using a reel etc. instead of a display device.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 (a) to 4 (j), a pattern which is a kind of a pattern is composed of nine types of main patterns each having a number “1” to “9” and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, a main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as an octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen (display area) of the third symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, an interruption, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. ing. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. Then, on the display screen, the symbols in each of the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, on the display screen, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become. In addition, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set on the display screen. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit A or a big hit B.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “probable symbols”, and when a jackpot A, which is a 16R variable jackpot, occurs, the same symbol is used. The combination of probable symbols is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “normal symbols”, and when a jackpot B, which is a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is used. Stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and the The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-described symbol, and for example, a configuration in which only numbers are variably displayed as the symbol may be employed.

<Symbol reduction display>
Next, the display area of the third symbol (special symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of the display area of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol is an area of the normal display area PL1 in a normal state when the variable display for notifying the result of the lottery is performed based on the lottery of the game, and is shown in FIG. 5B as described above. Thus, the third symbol is displayed. On the other hand, although details will be described later, when displaying the third symbol in a reduced size, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2 shown in FIG. 6A. When the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2, a display other than the third symbol is executed in the normal display area PL1.

  Although the reduced display area PL2 is a horizontally long area as shown in FIG. 6A, it may be a vertically long area as shown in FIG. 6B. 6A, the display area above the reduced display area in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively and widely used. Therefore, for example, when displaying a display mode in which the display screen is scrolled down from the top, the display area can be used in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  When the reduced display area PL2 is a vertically long area as shown in FIG. 6B, the display area on the right side of the reduced display area PL2 can be effectively used widely. Therefore, for example, when displaying a display mode in which the display area is scrolled from the right to the left, the display area can be used in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  The setting of the reduced display area PL2 may be fixed in advance, or the reduced display area PL2 may be changed as shown in FIG. 6A in accordance with the display mode when the third symbol is reduced and displayed. The configuration may be such that it is determined whether to set a horizontally long area or a vertically long area as shown in FIG. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem that the display style displayed in the normal display area PL1 becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the third symbol when the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2.

  Further, when a driving device that is driven (movable) is arranged at a position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the reduced display area PL2 may be appropriately determined according to the driving position of the driving device. . When the third symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, a display device different from the third symbol display device 81 which is not displayed is provided, and the third symbol is changed on the display device at a predetermined timing. You may comprise so that it may be switched so that it may be displayed. With this configuration, the player can effectively show the display mode to be displayed in the normal display area PL1, and can easily notify the player of the fluctuation display of the third symbol. Therefore, even if the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is not displayed and a display mode (for example, display of a character or the like) different from that of the third symbol is displayed, the third symbol display device 81 is different from the third symbol display device 81. Since the third symbol is displayed on a different display device, it can be easily determined that the lottery result is still being displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9, details of a display mode of the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 and the reduced display area PL2 will be described. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of the variable display of the third symbol in the normal display area PL1 of the third symbol display device 81. When the third symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, as described with reference to FIG. 5, the third symbol is displayed in three symbol columns (Z1 to Z3), and the displayed symbol is displayed. The result of the hit determination is notified by the combination of the third symbols displayed on the five activated lines (L1 to L5) of the symbols. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the third symbol, scroll display (in the present embodiment, from left to right) of all the third symbols displayed at the timing of the change start is started, as described later. After scroll display (dynamic display) at high speed, the display is switched to variable display at low speed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and then the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed. At this time, when the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines (L1 to L5), the reach display mode is set, and the player is notified by characters or voice such as "reach". On the other hand, if the reach display mode has not been reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is scroll-displayed at a low speed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed to notify the player that the lottery result has been lost.

  In the example of FIG. 7 (a), the left symbol L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 is a third symbol showing an 8 symbol with a main symbol of the angelfish numbered "8", and the middle symbol L2 is a sub symbol of a shell symbol, Nine symbols with the number "9" added to the main symbol of the crab are stopped and displayed on the right line L3. In the lower symbol row Z3, 9 symbols are displayed on the left line L1, a shell symbol is displayed on the middle line L2, and a lower right line L4 is displayed with 8 symbols stopped on the right line L3. This shows that the reach display mode is a double reach display mode with nine symbols.

  When the reach display mode is set, the middle symbol row Z2 is scroll-displayed at a low speed. Then, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern set so that the driving device 800 is driven to the driving position, the driving device 800 is switched to the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. Is driven to a position overlapping the front side of the normal display area PL1. In accordance with the driving of the driving device 800, the third symbol is reduced and displayed from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2. At this time, the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is not displayed, and the light effect display mode displayed in conjunction with the driving of the driving device 800 is displayed.

  Here, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2, which is reduced and displayed, of the eight symbols and the nine symbols displayed in the double reach display mode, nine symbols, which are positively variable symbols, are reduced and reduced. Displayed in display area PL2. The nine symbols displayed here are displayed in a state where only the main symbol of the crab is reduced and displayed. Thereby, the area for displaying the third symbol can be made smaller. Also, even in the double-reach display mode, by reducing and displaying only the probable symbol, the player has been changed to reach with the normal symbol, or if the jackpot is a normal symbol, By recognizing it, it is possible to prevent a problem that the desire to play is attenuated.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the double-reach display mode, of the third symbols constituting the double-reach display mode, only the positively-variable symbols are displayed in the single-reach display mode. Although described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that only normal symbols are displayed in the single-reach display mode. With this configuration, when the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 and the process of notifying the jackpot or the like by stopping the central symbol is executed, even in the case of the probability change jackpot (jackpot A), the normal jackpot (jackpot) is used. Also in B), it is possible to inform the player that the big hit is a normal symbol. In the case of displaying in the single-reach display mode of the probable variable symbol, if a normal jackpot (jackpot B) is won, the jackpot cannot be notified. On the other hand, by displaying in a normal pattern, for the time being, it informs the player that it is a normal jackpot for the time being, and then informs the player that the actual jackpot has been changed to further increase the player. Can please. On the other hand, if the jackpot is reported with the probability change symbol, and subsequently, it is reported that the jackpot has been a normal jackpot, the player will be discouraged, and the willingness to play the game will be reduced. However, with the configuration of this alternative example, such a problem can be solved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the nine symbols displayed in the upper symbol column Z1 are replaced with the left symbol of the reduced display line S1 in the reduced display area PL2. , The nine symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are displayed as right symbols of the reduced display line S1 in the reduced display area PL2. As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, the third symbol is scroll-displayed in the middle symbol of the reduced display line S <b> 1 in the reduced display area PL <b> 2. The width of the reduced display area PL2 in the up-down direction is made up of one or more and less than two reduced third symbols, and the width in the left-right direction of displaying the middle symbol of the reduced display area PL2 is the same as the width in the left-right direction. Three symbols are configured with a width of one or more and less than two. Therefore, by scrolling the third symbol in the vertical direction of the reduced display area, the scrolling of the third symbol can be performed in a space-saving manner and easily viewed. In the normal display area PL1, the third symbol is scroll-displayed by horizontal scrolling from right to left, but the third symbol is scroll-displayed by vertical scrolling from lower to upper. The player can easily notice that the third symbol is displayed. Therefore, if the third symbol is hidden from the normal display area PL1 and the third symbol is hidden before the result of the lottery is notified, it is possible to suppress a problem that confuses the player. .

  Further, when the third symbol is horizontally scrolled in the reduced display area PL1, the period in which the symbol is interrupted and displayed becomes longer, and it is difficult for the player to determine the third symbol. The period in which the entire three symbols can be displayed can be lengthened, and the player can easily identify the third symbol. In addition, since the third symbol in the present embodiment is a horizontally long symbol, in a display area for displaying the horizontally long third symbol, vertical scrolling is easy for a player to see. In the case where a vertically long display area is set, it is easier to see by scrolling horizontally. Therefore, by appropriately determining the scrolling direction according to the size and shape of the symbol and the shape of the display area, the third symbol can be easily recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, FIG. 9 illustrates a case of a single reach display mode in which one type of reach display mode is established, while FIG. 8 illustrates the double reach display mode. As shown in FIG. 9A, the upper symbol row Z1 has four symbols in the middle line L2 with sharks as the main symbol and the number "4", and the lower symbol row Z3 also has four symbols in the middle line L2. The single reach display mode in which the stop display is performed is shown. When the driving device 800 is driven to the driving position as shown in FIG. 9B, the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is not displayed, and the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. It is displayed reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the reduced display area PL2, by performing vertical scrolling from bottom to top, the symbol can be configured to fluctuate in the opposite direction (the third symbol is variably displayed in descending order). It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice that the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the third symbol is variably displayed in the reduced display area PL2 by vertical scrolling from bottom to top is described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and vertical scrolling from top to bottom may be used, and the symbol may be rotated. The symbol may be displayed in a variable manner, or the symbol may be displayed in a blinking manner and displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, not only by scroll display but also by displaying the color of the symbol in a color different from the color displayed in the normal display area PL1 (only the middle symbol or all symbols may be displayed), the player can easily notice. The configuration may be as follows. As described above, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is displayed in a different scroll display method, a different color, a different effect, or the like from the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1. It can be easily configured to be realized.

  In FIGS. 7 to 9, the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL <b> 2 is omitted (transparent or hidden) from the numeral indicating the symbol number, thereby displaying the third symbol. Although the configuration is such that the space can be made smaller, it is also possible to reduce the size of the third symbol in the same manner as displayed in the normal display area PL1 and display it in the reduced display area PL2. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, in the reduced display area PL2, as a left symbol, four main symbols (shark sharks) displayed in the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 displayed in the normal display area PL1. The main symbols (shark symbols) of four symbols displayed on the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3 displayed on the normal display area PL1 are displayed as the right symbols. In the middle symbol, a third symbol is vertically scrolled and displayed in the same manner as described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when a symbol is reduced, each symbol may be gradually displayed smaller, and the symbol may be moved from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to more easily understand and recognize that the display of the symbol is switched from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player loses the symbol.

  In addition, not only the pattern is gradually reduced, but also a display mode in which the display frame of the normal display area PL1 is displayed by a black line or the like and the frame is gradually reduced to the reduced display area PL2 is displayed. Is also good. Further, the present invention is not limited to the black line and the like, and may be configured to display a light effect or the like like an area frame.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol, which is performed when a ball passes through the second entrance 67, is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the change, a normal symbol (a second symbol) according to a lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" are alternately lit as the second symbol. A variable display is performed. When the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 for a predetermined time. It is configured so as to be in a state (opened), and as a result, the ball easily enters the first entrance hole 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and illuminated by the second symbol holding lamp 84. You. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83, and also the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and the number of passing balls at the second entrance 67 is three or less, or five or more. (For example, eight times). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol retaining lamp 84 may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the result of the drawing is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses so that the big hit is stopped. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (a 16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening / closing frontward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot win or is hard to win. At the time of the big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on on the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A first type random number used for setting an initial value of a first random number counter C1, a stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting an outage type of stop in a special symbol, A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 28). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance port. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. The RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to a special value. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it decides that it is the big hit of the special design. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used when the special symbol has a low probability (the period when the special symbol is in the low probability state) and when the special symbol has a high probability of becoming a special symbol jackpot from the low probability (the special symbol) ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers which are big hits different, the probability of big hits is changed between a low probability of a special symbol and a high probability of a special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the special symbol low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. It is provided in.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first random number is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol comes off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a special symbol jackpot, the value corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode is that at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. In the first random number counter C1, when the special symbol has a low probability, there are three random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7, 107, 282" is a special symbol for the low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of the random numbers is three and the total number of the random numbers to be the big hit is three, so the probability of the big hit of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, there are thirty random numbers which are the jackpots of the special symbol, and the value is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300 and the total number of jackpot random numbers is 30, so the probability of the special symbol jackpot is "1/10".

  In this embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and the random number value of the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability time Therefore, a random number value for each jackpot is set so as not to be a duplicate value. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10 as the random number value of the jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily illegally allocated. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the random number value of the jackpot is changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state). This makes it difficult to predict the random number value that will be a special symbol jackpot, thereby suppressing fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random value is “0 to 59” is “big hit A”. When the value is “60 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit B”.

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hits (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random number value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value) is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and rear" (e.g., 98, 99), and "reach other than front and rear out" (e.g., in a range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at positions other than before and after the reach symbol after reaching. Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely out of range" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 in the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203. It is stored in the area 203a.

  The random number for determining the special symbol stop type from the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random value) is set by a stop type selection table (not shown). It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in this embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for the high probability case and a special symbol for the low probability case. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol high-probability state or the special symbol low-probability state.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a large-hit table is provided for a high-probability state in which the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 89, so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a jackpot is likely to occur. Is selected, and “completely deviated” is easily selected. In this table, the "reach out of front and rear" is narrowed to 98 and 99 and the "reach other than front and rear out" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "reach out of front and rear" or "reach other than front and rear out". In addition, in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is 0 to 79, which is a small low probability. Is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely out of order".

  In the stop type selection table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than out of front and rear” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than out of front and rear out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, a lot of reach displays with a long production time can be performed, so that the ball entry time to the first entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “reach out of order” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as a so-called normal reach and a super reach is determined by the variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 28) described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. I have.

  In the variation pattern table, for example, “variation (for a long time)”, “variation (for a short time)”, “variable normal reach”, “variable super reach”, “variable special reach” as variation patterns for the deviation. Various types are defined, and as the variation patterns of the jackpot A and the jackpot B, various types of “shared normal reach”, various types of “shared super reach”, and various types of “shared special reach” are defined. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected in accordance with the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed, and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by a random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the normal symbol. When the value matches the value of the random number which is a win set by the win random number table, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. In addition, the random number table per ordinary symbol is used when the ordinary symbol has a low probability (the period in which the ordinary symbol is in the normal state) and when the ordinary symbol has a higher probability of being hit by the ordinary symbol than when the ordinary symbol has a low probability. And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of them are set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, at the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random numbers which are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, when the normal symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 24 out of a total of 240 random numbers, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has the low probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “○” is illuminated and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random numbers, and thus the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened“ 1 second × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the first entrance 64 is opened “1 second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 28).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 12, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 28), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 27). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 stores a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, respectively.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number). Out of the vacant areas from 1 area to the reserved fourth area, the area numbers are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in an area having a smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is made.

  When data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each of these areas stores a second random number counter C4.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding area). Of the vacant areas in the (fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control device 110, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a normal symbol is made.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the winning prize stored in the other reserved area is stored as in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack the data into the reserved area with the smaller area number. The data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of a special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c increases by 1 to a maximum value of four. It is added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S205 in FIG. 21).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 21 and S405 in FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 to display the variable display reserved ball retained in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of retained balls of the variable display, which is managed by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, is changed to the actual number of retained balls of the variable display retained by the main control device 110 due to noise or the like. Even if it has shifted, the shift can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number to notify the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d counts the number of waiting balls (the number of times of waiting) of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. The counter counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. (See S704 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 24).

  If the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67 and the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is less than 4, a random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203b. It is not performed (S703 in FIG. 25: No).

  The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction counter 203e is set to zero, and the main controller 110 performs a lottery of a special symbol, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value according to the big hit type is set. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of the value of the time-saving medium time counter 203e.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the "big hit B" is set, it is set to 100 (see S214 in FIG. 21). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol fluctuating effect is completed until the value of the counter 203e during working hours is reduced to 0 (S217 in FIG. 21).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter 203e during time saving is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on a random number per symbol symbol for a high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during time saving is 0, the lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed based on the random number table for the ordinary symbols for the low probability time (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 24).

  The other memory area 203z is an area in which the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores various other flags, data, and the like necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). The display control device 114 controls setting of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as “display”. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The sound lamp control device 222 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 has at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and another memory area 223z. .

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information.

  The special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol retaining ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. The counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variable effect that is suspended in the main control device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, and It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1408 in FIG. 31). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and also stores the stored special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the value.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1602 in FIG. 32). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 31), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1607 in FIG. 32).

  The RAM 223 further has another storage area 223z for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is formed by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 30) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Directing). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical configuration of display control device 114>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 33) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and outputs one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects the V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data in the resident video RAM 235, so that there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Last address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read over time from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Also, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image (displayed on the third symbol display device 81) from when the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. In the present embodiment, this is an area for storing data corresponding to “display the characters“ Please hold for a while during power-on ”). In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed in the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 33).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image in the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 turns on the power-on main image. (In this embodiment, the character "Please hold for a while during power-on") on the display screen, a power-on fluctuation image of a "O" symbol and a "O" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen At the same position, a power-on fluctuation image of a "X" symbol is alternately displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the "○" image is displayed for a fixed period after stopping the variable effect, and if it is "special symbol loss", the "x" image is displayed for the variable effect. Display for a certain period after stopping.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area From the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instructed. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  When the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) numbered "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a dolphin, a shark, a shrimp, etc. is also resident as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. Can be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thus, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately even if the character ROM 234 is a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and for each sub-area, the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character data ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for drawing an image, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This area stores transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect , A display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a prize ball when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol and the first entrance is released. When the ball easily enters the ball opening 64, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol composed of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. If there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variable effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are set according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And light in the image, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is specified. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the “town stage”, the “sky stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or Information for specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a rear image different from the rear surfaces A to C, the rear type also includes information for specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the backs A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A to C as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time from when the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the back type (or the third symbol display device 81). May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which a range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

<Display data table (3rd design)>
The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the number continuity. be able to.

  Next, the display data of the third symbol set in the display data table will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 shows only an example of the data for the third symbol (symbol 1 to symbol 3) in the example of the display data table. Symbols 1 to 3 indicate information of symbols to be displayed in symbol columns Z1 to Z3, respectively. As shown in FIG. 16, during the period from address 0001H to address 01F4H, the symbols are scrolled on the third symbol display device 81 at high speed from right to left. Specifically, by changing the symbol type offset for each address (for example, one symbol plus one symbol), the symbols are scrolled and displayed at high speed. In this case, by designating the symbol with an offset from the stop symbol of the previous variation, the variation from the previous stop symbol can be smoothly and smoothly executed. Switching from high-speed scroll fluctuation to low-speed scroll fluctuation is triggered by the address 01F4H. In the low-speed scroll fluctuation, for example, the symbol type offset information is changed every ten addresses or the like (for example, the symbol plus one), so that the speed at which the symbol is scroll-displayed is reduced. In the low-speed fluctuation period, the symbol type offset information becomes the offset information from the stop symbol of the current fluctuation, and continuity can be easily provided to the stop symbol.

  Next, FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a display data table corresponding to a variation pattern when the third symbol is changed from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2 and displayed, and only information on the third symbol will be described. It is extracted and shown. From the address 0001H to the address 2711H, the symbols 1 to 3 are scroll-displayed in the horizontal direction in the normal display area PL1. At address 2711H, symbol 1 and symbol 3 are in the reach state in which they stop at the same symbol in the normal display area PL1. Thereafter, when the address reaches 04E2H, the symbol 2 is reduced to the reduced display area PL2 and the symbol 2 is scroll-displayed in the reach state. At the address 06D6, the symbols 1 to 3 are stopped and displayed in the normal display area PL1 in the same symbols as the stopped symbols.

  As described above, since the variation pattern in which the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is also set in the display data table, it is easy to select the display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. The control of the reduced display can be executed.

  In a case where the reduced display of the third symbol is reduced step by step and the third symbol is gradually moved to the reduced display area PL2, the display data table may include the enlargement ratio and the display position coordinates with time. By setting each of them, display control can be easily performed. Also, when displaying an effect, a display frame, or the like for notifying that the third symbol is to be reduced and moved to the reduced display area PL2, the display data table is set to an address corresponding to a predetermined timing. By doing so, the display can be easily controlled.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 15) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 19) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on a result of a lottery performed based on a winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  Note that if all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 18 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 18 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 18, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 19) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 18, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 33). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S3305 in FIG. 46B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 35 ()), and When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 35) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (Refer to S2109 of (b)). On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 38) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 39 to 41) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 46A), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sets the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 19) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction with respect to, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 19) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 19) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 35 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S2605 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 19), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw one frame of image generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is output for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged at the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged at the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 35 (b) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S2607 of FIG. 39). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of the other sprite that is to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3502 in FIG. 48).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 35B) is executed, it is performed (see S3502 of FIG. 48).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and thereafter, A start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball passes through the second entrance 67 through the through gate. The processing is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and fires the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed at 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times of suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by the calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the number-of-retained-balls command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol-reserved-ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and the variation time is determined. If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. If the special symbol is a big hit, according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Is determined to be a jackpot A or a jackpot B.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A occurs, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the big hit B occurs, the red LED is turned on. In the case of a disconnection, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change stops.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is: It is determined whether it is a special symbol jackpot (S211). If the result of this lottery is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), it is determined what the jackpot type is among the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A and jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type is determined. If is a big hit A, the setting related to the big hit A is executed (S213). In the setting relating to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the probability of changing the jackpot are set (S213). In the case of the jackpot B, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time savings (100 in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S215), and the present process ends.

  In the processing of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203e is equal to or greater than 1 (S216: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped, and the present process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). The special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is an execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the first and second symbols, the lottery of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol departure" is carried out (whether or not), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute This is a process for determining an effect pattern (a change effect pattern) of a change effect to be performed.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is obtained. (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (probable change) (S302). If the game is in the high-probability game state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for the high probability (S303).

  In the process of S303, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is obtained based on the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 30 random number values stored in the special symbol large hit random number table for high probability. As described above, the random number value to be a special symbol jackpot is “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168”. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the If the random numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, if the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301 and the low probability probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol jackpot is obtained is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of “7, 107, 282” are set as the random numbers for the special symbol big hit, and when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches the random numbers of these hits. Is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S305), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is (S305: Yes), The display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S306). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S307). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S307, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol until it stops. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is checked, and the variation of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. Determine the pattern (fluctuation time). The relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation time is defined in advance by the variation pattern table 202a (see FIG. 11).

  For example, as the variation patterns for the departure, “departure”, various types of “normal reach departure”, various types of “super reach departure”, and various types of “special reach departure” are defined. Variation patterns for jackpot A include various types of "probably variable jackpot normal reach", various types of "probable variable jackpot super reach", and various types of "probable variable jackpot special reach". Variation patterns for jackpot B include various types of "normal jackpot normal reach" , "Normal jackpot super reach" and "Normal jackpot special reach" are specified.

  In the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way (S305: No), the display mode at the time of the out of place is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off-design.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined from the variation pattern table 202a shown in FIG. 11 (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation pattern of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. (Fluctuation time) is determined.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or S309 is set (S310). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of a big hit) is set (S311). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound ramp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 28). You. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol changing process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win, This is a process for executing a hold process of the values indicated by the various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is retained in the special symbol N) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol reserved ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S405, the values of the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, and stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first one of the empty reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the ordinary symbol change process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol variation process (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 are performed. While being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of suspended display of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S604). If the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: S604). No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the first area in the hold → the execution area, the second area in the hold → the first area in the hold, the third area in the area → the second area in the hold, the fourth area in the area → the third area in the hold, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the during-hours counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time reduction counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state. If the value of the counter 203e during time reduction is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is equal to or greater than 1 (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be hard to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (ie, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, and the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent a ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64, even if it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the first entrance 64 during the jackpot of the special symbol, the first winning opening 65a is not required. Many balls enter the entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, and thus is acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 thus obtained and the random number table for normal symbols for high probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 13B).

  In the processing of S608, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the processing shifts to S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 is set to the low value. Based on the random number table for ordinary symbols for probabilities, a lottery result is determined as to whether or not the symbol is a regular symbol (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per symbol for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of “0, 4, 29 to 239”, It is usually determined that the symbol is out of the pattern (see FIG. 13B).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612). Then, the display mode of the hit is set (S613). In the process of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “と し て” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the special symbol is hit at this moment. It is determined whether or not it is (S615). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the special symbol big hit, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol hits, the same as when the normal symbol comes off In addition, the number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, so the first entrance The opening period of the motorized accessory associated with 64 is set to one second, the number of times of opening is set to two times (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0. In addition to the setting of 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the processing of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619). If the value of the time reduction counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The change time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the counter 203e during the working hours is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, at the time of the high probability of the ordinary symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of the low probability of the ordinary symbol. Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). Note that the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S620 or S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lighted display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display updating process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the end, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is a hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of this lottery is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 28) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the ordinary symbol (S624: No), the processing of S625 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 20), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed at the second entrance 67, and when a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and suspending it.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203d (the number of times M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol is retained) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol retention ball number counter 203d is 4 If not less than (S703: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the ordinary symbol retaining ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the first one of the free reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S705), and the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the initial area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the initial area.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S801). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also shifts to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S912 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S913, S914) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S904: Yes), S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transmitted to each of the sub-side control devices (peripheral devices). An external output process to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 21) and the start winning process (see FIG. 20) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or the specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning port 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 24). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the ordinary symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. Beginning at device 37. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED.If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And the red LED is turned on.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22) ends, the first symbol display device The variable display executed in 37 is ended, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display in the display mode set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 22). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24), the variation symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 24), the process is executed by the second symbol display device 83. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). More specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1008, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 26 has been executed, the processing at S1012 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to game state changes performed in S1001 to S1007 or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

<Control Process Executed by MPU 221 of Voice Lamp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing in S1318 (see FIG. 30). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (see S1315 in FIG. 30), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1318. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1318 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), this startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S1318 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1204. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1318, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1318 (see S1317 in FIG. 30). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is performed, so that the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is on is instantaneous in this startup process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1204 to S1206 passes through the process of S1208. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process skips S1209, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S1210, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S1211), and shifts to the main processing.

  The reason why the clearing process in S1209 is skipped is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is performed via the process in S1206, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the processing of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. S1302 to S1310 are mainly processing relating to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process in S1312, the command determination process in S1311, and the process of updating the counter values in S1313 and S1314 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output mode of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to perform notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be done. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display updating process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change in the rear image change command, the display controller 114 converts the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into an image corresponding to the stage. Is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the frame button 22 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or the frame button 22 is pressed during the reach effect to display the expectation of the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a holding effect, or the frame button 22 may be a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the processing of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing in S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1310), and the flow shifts to the processing in S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S1312). In the variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1315 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off processing is executed (S1316). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S1317), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1403). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1404). When the stop type command is received (S1404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1405), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1406). Return to processing. The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1407). Then, when the reserved ball count command is received (S1407: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball count command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol) Is extracted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1408). In the process of S1408, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S1408, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first entrance 64 or when a special symbol is drawn. Is detected, or every time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol retaining ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1408 to the special symbol retaining ball number counter of the main control device 110. 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of symbol lottery, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1407, if the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S1407: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed (S1409). ), And return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). The variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1601). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S1605. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1601: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1602), and then, in the process of S1403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern is determined. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S1603).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1605). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1605: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that the variable display is performed. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1606). Then, in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1607).

  In the process of S1608, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609. Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the stop type corresponding to the exact stop type (complete loss, front / rear reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.).

  In the process of S1609, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1609). . The display control device 114 receives the stop type command for display, so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control processing executed by MPU 231 of display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 33). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S1802 in FIG. 33) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 35, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1902 and S1902, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S1805). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 47A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 47A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B), the simple command determination processing is performed so that the power-on image (not shown) (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) is drawn. (See S2108 in FIG. 35B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 in FIG. 35B).

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. When the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the display change pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power is also increased. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S1805, interruption permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S1806, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 19) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in a frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a symbol determination process is executed (S2104). In this symbol determination processing (S2104), the variation state of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (whether or not high-speed variation is in progress) is determined, and based on the state, the third symbol is displayed. A process for determining three symbols is executed. The symbol determination processing (S2104) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Next, task processing is executed (S2105). In this task process, the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109) and the symbol determination process (S2104) is specified. Based on the content, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite. The task processing (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2106). In this transfer setting process (S2106), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is being operated. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2106) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2107). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2105), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S2106) are used. The drawing list shown in FIG. 19 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing processing according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2108). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2108, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2102), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2203).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), and returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is used. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set in the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variation table data is set. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305, the display data table buffer 233d set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S2302. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back, and complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B) is executed, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402. In the above-described task process (S2105), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2403, and the specified stop is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of the drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely off, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S2402.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2206, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is (S2208: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2501). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S2502). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S2501, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S2502 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2208, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2208: No), then, a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2210), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes) ), And execute the respective processes from S2202 to S2210 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S2201 to S2210 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 37A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 37B), which are processing corresponding to each command, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 37A) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2601). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S2601: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S2602 to S2604 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2605. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2601: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the new command flag is set to off (S2602), and then S2603 to S2604. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the processing of S2603, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2603). If the error occurrence flag is on (S2603: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S2604).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S2701).

  In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed for each sprite. Determine necessary parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2701, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S2702), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S2604) or in the process of S2603, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2603: No), the process proceeds to S2605.

  In S2605, a pointer update process is performed (S2605). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S2801). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S2802: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a display data table for demonstration (S2803), and if it is a display data table for demonstration (S2803: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S2804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S2805), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2803, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S2803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S2802: No), the process ends and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2606). In the task processing, the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S2606 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S2607), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2608). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S2608: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S2608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S2609).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S2609: Yes), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S2610), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S2612), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2613). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2614), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S2615), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and thus the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S2615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2105), until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the immediately preceding fluctuation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S2615, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2609, if the confirmed display flag is not on but off (S2609: No), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S2616). If the demonstration display flag is OFF (S2616: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S2617), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2618). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S2619). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2620), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S2621), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S2616, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S2616: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, and the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, for a predetermined time, the image of the power-on fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, details of the above-described symbol determination processing (S2104), which is one of the symbol determination processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the symbol determination processing (S2104).

  In the symbol determination process (S2104), first, it is determined whether or not the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is in the high-speed fluctuation period (S2820). Here, whether or not the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed can be determined based on the position of the pointer indicating the processing of the set display data table.

  As shown in FIG. 15, information of symbols to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set in the display data table. At each address, symbol information whose display content is updated every 20 ms is set. FIG. 16 shows only the symbol information of the display data table extracted for easy understanding. The configuration is such that it is possible to determine whether or not the period is a high-speed change period, corresponding to each address. In the high-speed fluctuation period, the symbol type offset information is set to be changed, for example, for each address (every time the pointer is updated). With this setting, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed every 20 ms, and it is possible to show the player that the third symbol is variably displayed at high speed. In the low-speed fluctuation period, the symbol offset information is changed and set every ten addresses (every time the pointer is updated ten times). With this setting, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed every 200 ms, so that the player can be seen as if the variable symbol is displayed at a low speed. In this way, by appropriately setting the symbol type offset information in the display data table, the speed at which the third symbol is variably displayed can be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed for each of the third symbols is set in the display data table. However, for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbol row data to be displayed is displayed as a symbol. The display range may be set in advance, and the display range may be set by the offset information of the display data table. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set offset information and the like for each of the third symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the data amount of the display data table can be reduced.

  If it is determined that the period is the high-speed change period (S2820: Yes), the symbol in which the predetermined symbol number is offset from the previous stopped symbol of the third symbol based on the symbol type offset information set in the display data table. Third symbols to be displayed in the columns Z1 to Z3 are determined (S2821).

  Specifically, based on the symbols stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the previous symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols to be displayed are determined by offsetting the offset amount indicated by the symbol type offset information therefrom. The symbols displayed on the middle line L2 and the right line L3 of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are determined based on the symbols displayed on the left line L1.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2820, if it is determined that the period is other than the high-speed fluctuation period, the offset amount indicated by the symbol type offset information set in the display data table from the symbol of the current fluctuation stop is added to the process of S2821. The symbols to be displayed are determined and set in the drawing list (S2822). Here, not only during the low-speed fluctuation period, but also during the period in which the third symbol is stopped, the symbol to be displayed is determined based on the offset amount from the stopped symbol determined by the current fluctuation.

  As described above, in the high-speed fluctuation period, since the symbol to be displayed is determined by the offset from the stop symbol in the previous fluctuation, the scroll fluctuation of the symbol can be performed without discomfort from the state where the fluctuation is stopped last time. Further, when switching from the high-speed fluctuation period to the low-speed fluctuation period, by switching the processing to the offset from the stop symbol determined by the current fluctuation, the scroll display up to the stop symbol can be performed without discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, details of the above-described task processing (S2105), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this task processing (S2105).

  In the task process (S2105), first, a background calculation process is executed (S2901). In the arithmetic processing for the background, the control update target of this time is grasped from the backmost still image and the background sprite which constitute the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a two-dimensional plane, a rotation angle, a scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 233 in correspondence with each individual image.

  In subsequent S2902, effect calculation processing is executed (S2902). In the effect calculation process, among the effect sprites constituting an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect, the current control update target is grasped. Further, the above various parameters are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameters in the area secured in the work RAM 233 so as to correspond to various individual images.

  In the subsequent process of S2903, a symbol calculation process is executed (S2903). In the symbol calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the symbols to be subjected to the fluctuation display in each game time. Also. The various parameters described above are derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameters in areas secured in the work RAM 233 so as to correspond to various individual images. The symbol calculation process (S2903) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  After that, in the process of S2904, after performing the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, the present task process ends. In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, the process of grasping the individual image included in the image of one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction among the individual images subjected to the control update by the processes of S2901 to S2903. Execute

  This grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the currently set drawing range and the information of the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images for which control has been started, but are only the individual images to be displayed, so that the image controller 237 selects the individual images to be displayed. There is no need to do this, and even if no selection is made, there is no need to wastefully perform drawing processing on individual images that are not display targets. Thereby, the processing load on the image controller 237 is reduced.

  Next, the symbol calculation process (S2903), which is one of the task processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the symbol calculation process (S2903).

  In the symbol calculation process (S2903), first, various parameters such as coordinates, size, and rotation angle are calculated and derived for the symbol sprite data displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S3001), and the derived various parameters are calculated. The control information is updated by writing the parameter information in the area secured in the work RAM 233 in correspondence with the symbol sprite data (S3002). Next, it is determined whether it is the execution timing to partially display the symbol of the third symbol (S3003). Whether or not it is time to display a part is determined by referring to information specified by the current pointer in the currently set display data table. Here, the state where the partial display of the symbol is executed is, if the symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, if there is a symbol displayed outside the normal display area PL1. The symbols must be displayed in a completely transparent state. When a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction, so that the symbol in the horizontal direction (for example, half of the symbol in the horizontal direction) is displayed in a completely transparent state. On the other hand, when the reduced display is set, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, among the symbols displayed in the reduced display area PL2, the central symbol in the central row scrolls vertically. Therefore, depending on the coordinates (position) where the symbol is displayed, a part of the symbol displayed outside the reduced display area PL2 is displayed in a completely transparent state. When the display is reduced, as shown in FIG. 8A or 8C, a part of the design in the vertical direction (for example, the upper half) is displayed in a completely transparent state.

  If it is determined that it is time to perform partial display (S3003: Yes), it is determined whether it is during the reduced display period (S3004).

  Here, partial α data related to symbol display and overall α data described later will be described. As described above, the α data is transmission information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance as image data. α data is individually set for image data that defines individual images such as background data and sprite data, but for design sprite data, α data for the whole and α data for parts are set respectively. Have been.

  The design sprite data includes an image area to be displayed on the display screen as an individual image, and a frame area surrounding the image area. The frame region enables the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 to handle the design sprite data as rectangularly defined image data regardless of the outer edge shape of the image region, thereby facilitating designation of coordinates.

  The size of the whole α data is set so that the outer shape matches the design sprite data to be applied. The overall α data includes an image corresponding region occupying the inside of the outer edge portion and a frame corresponding region occupying the outside of the outer edge portion, with the outer edge portion of the image region in the design sprite data to be applied as a boundary.

  For each pixel included in the frame-corresponding region, “0”, which is complete transmission information, is set as the α value. On the other hand, 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion of the image corresponding region except the outer edge portion.

  By applying the whole α data to the symbol sprite data, the α value of each pixel included in the image corresponding region is applied to each pixel included in the image region, and further, each of the pixels included in the frame region is included. The α value of each pixel included in the frame corresponding region is applied to the pixel.

  In this case, as described above, the size of the whole α data is set so that the outer shape matches the design sprite data to be applied. Therefore, by setting the size and the rotation angle of both data to be the same and setting both data so that the reference pixel such as one pixel at the center overlaps, the entire α data can be applied to the symbol sprite data. The processing load related to the setting is reduced. This is the same for the partial α data.

Further, when the design sprite data to which the general α data is applied is superimposed with the image data overlapping on the back side of the display screen, the α value defined in the general α data is set for each dot related to the superposition. Fusion (that is, blending) of the reference numerical information is performed. In particular,
R: “R value of rear image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “R value of front image” × “α value”
G: “G value of rear image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “G value of front image” × “α value”
B: “B value of back image” × (“1” − “α value”) + “B value of front image” × “α value”
It becomes. This is the same for the partial α data.

  By applying the α data for the whole, in the design after the application, the frame region is in a completely transparent state, and only the image region is visible. In addition, shaggy that occurs in the outline of the design is reduced, and the color can be smoothly changed so that the outline of the design fuses with the background. That is, anti-aliasing can be performed.

  On the other hand, the size of the partial α data is set so that the outer shape matches the design sprite data to be applied. The partial α data has an outer edge portion corresponding to a part of the image region in the design sprite data to be applied as a boundary, and a non-part corresponding area occupying the inside of the outer edge portion.

  For each pixel included in the corresponding region other than a part, “0” which is complete transmission information is set as the α value. On the other hand, in the partial image corresponding region, “1” which is opaque information is set as an α value for each pixel included in a portion excluding the outer edge portion, and an α value is set for each pixel included in the outer edge portion. Is set as 0 <α value <1 which is partial transmission information.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. It is determined whether the symbol is in the reduced display period in which the symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 (S3004). If it is determined that it is during the reduced display period (S3004: Yes), the α data for the vertical portion of the symbol sprite data is grasped (S3005). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol display period is displayed in the normal display area PL1 (S3004: No), α data for the horizontal portion of the symbol sprite data is set (S3006). . Here, when a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is horizontally scrolled and displayed in a fluctuating manner, so that the horizontal area where the symbol is displayed outside the normal display area PL1 is in a completely transparent state. Is displayed.

  It is determined whether it is necessary to set the entire α data (S3007). Here, it is determined whether it is necessary to display the entire symbol in a transparent state. In the case where the entire symbol is displayed in a completely transparent state, it is set when it is necessary to show the background on the back side of the symbol as an effect. Further, even during the high-speed fluctuation display, the whole α data is set because the symbols need to be transparently displayed. As a result, the symbols can be displayed collectively in the transmission state, and the load in the transmission control can be reduced. Further, the α data for the whole is configured to be set for each symbol, but may be configured to be set for all symbols.

  If it is determined that the α data for the whole needs to be set (S3007: Yes), the process of S3008 is executed. In the process of S3008, the entire α data of each symbol is grasped and set (S3008). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no need to set the overall α data (S3007: No), the combination designation information is set (S3009). As the combination designation information, information obtained by combining the partial α data and the entire α data is set as transparent information.

  Next, it is determined whether it is a timing to reduce and display the symbol in the reduced display area PL2 of the third symbol display device 81 (S3010). If it is determined that it is the timing to reduce the symbol (S3010: Yes), a symbol reduction display process is executed (S3011). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of the reduced display (S3010: No), the process ends.

  Next, the symbol reduction display processing (S3011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the symbol reduction display processing (S3011).

  In the symbol reduction display processing (S3011), first, it is determined whether it is time to start reducing the symbol (third symbol) from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2 (S3101). Here, the timing at which the reduced display is started is the timing at which the fluctuation of the symbol is switched from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation in the present embodiment.

  If it is determined that it is time to start the reduced display (S3101: Yes), the process of S3102 is executed. In the processing of S3102 to S3106, an initial setting processing for performing reduced display is executed. Specifically, in the process of S3102, the initial symbol sprite data (sprite data of the symbol to be reduced) is grasped (S3102). The coordinate data for specifying the place where the initial symbol sprite data is drawn is set (S3103).

  Initial setting of scale information is performed (S3104). Specifically, the scale information is set to an initial value “1”. As a result, the initial symbol sprite data is displayed on the display screen in the same size. A process for updating the parameter is executed (S3105). The value of the reduction counter is set to “0” which is the initial value (S3106). This reduction counter is a counter used when changing the scale information of the initial symbol sprite data, and is used for grasping the end timing of the stepwise reduction display.

  On the other hand, if it is not the reduced display start timing (S3101: No), it is determined whether it is the reduced display period (S3108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reduction counter is “30”. If the reduction counter is less than 30, it is determined that the display period is the reduction display period.

  When it is determined that the period is the reduced display period (S3108: Yes), the initial symbol sprite data is grasped (S3109). In this case, the initial symbol sprite data is the symbol data determined in the process of S2822 in the symbol determination process (FIG. 42, S2104).

  The coordinates for displaying the symbol are set (S3111). The value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the reduction counter (S3112). The scale information is updated (S3113). This scale information is set by 1-0.02 × Z (reduction counter value). Update of other parameter information is executed (S3114).

  In the case of this reduction period, the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is gradually reduced, and the reduced third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. Note that the initial symbol sprite data in the reduction period is a reach symbol. In the case of the double-reach display mode, a probable symbol is set as initial symbol sprite data.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not the reduction period (S3108: No), reduced symbol sprite data is grasped (S3115). The coordinates for displaying the symbol sprite data are set (S3116). In this case, coordinates corresponding to each symbol in the reduced display area PL2 are set. The scale information is set in the same manner as in S3113 (S3117). Update of other parameters is performed (S3118).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3201: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3202), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3201: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3203), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3202), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3202).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S3301). If the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3301: Yes) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S3302). In the process of S3302, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3302 (S3302: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3302: Yes), the process proceeds to S3303. Also, as a result of the process of S3301, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3301: No), the process proceeds to S3303.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3303), and if there is an untransferred resident target image data (S3303: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3304), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3303, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S3303: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3305), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B), the command determination processing (see FIGS. 36 to 38) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 39 to 41) are performed instead of the simple command determination processing and the simple display setting processing. ) Is executed, so that the normal image drawing is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 47) (see S3201: No in FIG. 46A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3203), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3203).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S2605) of the previously executed display setting processing (S2103). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S3401). Then, it is determined whether or not the obtained information is transfer data information (S3402). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S3402: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3403) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3404), and the flow shifts to the processing of S3405.

  In the process of S3402, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3402: No), the process of S3403 and S3404 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. In the process of S3405, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S3405), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S3405: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3406).

  In the process of S3406, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3406 (S3406: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3406: Yes), the process proceeds to S3407. Also, as a result of the processing in S3405, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing has been completed (S3405: No), the processing shifts to S3407.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on (S3407). If the transfer start flag is on (S3407: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S3408),
In the process of S3409, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3409). The determination in the process of S3409 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3409 (S3409: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3409, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3409: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3410). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S3410, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3411), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, details of the above-described drawing processing (S2106), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 19 is generated (S3501). That is, in the process of S3501, the type of storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2105). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2104), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3502, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3503). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 35B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed.

<Process in Image Controller 237>
Next, basic processing executed by the image controller 237 will be described. The image controller 237 sets a register value based on a command transmitted from the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and creates drawing data in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list. The processing for outputting an image signal to the third symbol display device 81 based on the drawing data created in the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is executed.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register is executed each time a command is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. The process of creating drawing data is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). The process of outputting an image signal is executed by a display circuit (not shown) at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Next, the image data creation processing (S4200) executed by the image controller of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the image data creation processing (S4200) executed by the image controller. This image data creation processing (S4200) is based on the drawing list created in the drawing processing (S2106 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. To perform drawing (display output).

  It is determined whether all the drawing information specified by the set drawing list has been drawn (S4201). If it is determined that all the drawing information has been drawn (S4201: Yes), it is determined whether a new drawing list has been received (S4202). If it is determined that a new drawing list has not been received (S4202: No), the process of S4207 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a new drawing list has been received (S4202: Yes), a corresponding process at the time of reception is executed (S4203).

  In the response processing at the time of reception, it is determined from the information included in the drawing list whether the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is created in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236b. Then, the grasped frame buffer is set as a drawing data creation target. In addition, the video decoder operates to determine whether or not there is a decode specification, and if there is a decode specification, to know the address to which the moving image data to be decoded is transferred, and to decode the moving image data. Let it. Next, the process of S4205 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that the drawing is not completed (S4201: No), the drawing list counter is updated (S4204). Thereby, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the process of S4205 is executed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, but may be configured to process a plurality of image data in one drawing process. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each of the processing times, and a configuration in which different numbers of image data are processed in each of the processing times of the drawing processing may be employed.

  In the process of S4205, a content comprehension process is executed (S4205). In this content comprehension processing (S4205), the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameters of the image data are grasped. In the case of sprite data, color pallet data is applied to each dot of the bitmap image. Next, a writing process is performed (S4206). Next, the process of S4207 is executed.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether the output of the image signal for one frame is completed (S4207). If the processing has not been completed (S4207: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the processing has been completed (S4207: Yes), the V interrupt signal indicating that the output of the image signal for one frame has been completed (drawing of one frame has been completed) to the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. Is output (S4208), and this process ends.

  The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit to the third symbol display device 81 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is employed as described above, the output of the image signal is This is performed in parallel with the creation of the drawing data one frame after the frame related to the output. Note that the display circuit has a selector circuit that alternately switches a frame buffer to be referred to each time the output of an image signal for one frame is completed. The frame buffer is restricted so as not to be an output target for outputting an image signal.

  In the configuration of the present embodiment, the horizontally long third symbols are arranged side by side on the horizontally elongated third symbol display device 81 and displayed in the reduced display area PL2, so that the display area in the short direction of the third symbol display device 81 is widened. Can be used.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 6B, a horizontally long third symbol is displayed on the horizontally elongated third symbol display device 81 in the reduced display area PL2 in the short direction of the third symbol. Thus, the area in the long direction of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used. Further, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be effectively used in a shape close to a square.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol is reduced from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2 at the timing of starting the reduced display, and the symbol is reduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The scale information of the symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is set to be small every predetermined period (for example, every 0.5 s), and the coordinates to be displayed are gradually reduced in accordance with the predetermined period. You may comprise so that it may set so that it may approach PL2. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily inform the player that the symbol is moved and displayed, and recognize the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the display of the symbol. Further, in addition to gradually reducing the pattern, the display frame may be displayed and moved to the reduced display area PL2 so as to be gradually reduced and displayed, or an arrow may be displayed so as to point to the reduced display area PL2. You may comprise so that it may display on the 3rd symbol display device 81. Further, the light effect may be gradually displayed toward the reduced display area PL2.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol data of the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed in the normal display area PL1. Apart from the symbol data of the third symbol, the symbol data of the third symbol dedicated to be displayed in the reduced display area PL1 may be set in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114. Since the third symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2 has a small display area, the number of pixels and the like can be reduced, and the display data of the third symbol can be reduced. Therefore, when the display of the third symbol is controlled in the reduced display area PL2, the control load in the drawing processing of the image controller 237 can be reduced. Therefore, the time for generating the display data can be shortened, and the inconvenience such as the processing failure that cannot be generated for the display data within the predetermined time can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the reduced display area PL2 is configured as a predetermined area. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be. Further, the position and the size may be changed depending on the operation position of the driving device 800. With this configuration, it is possible to display the third symbol at a position and size that are easily viewable as appropriate according to the display mode, the movement of the driving device, and the like. Therefore, the lottery result can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, the reduced display area PL2 may be provided not on the third symbol display device 81 but on another sub-display or the like. With this configuration, the player can more easily recognize the third symbol. Further, the degree of freedom in the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

<Another example of the first embodiment>
Another example of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 is first used until all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 when the power is turned on. The case has been described in which an image (characters or symbols of “O” or “X”) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the image data stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. In the pachinko machine 10 according to another example of the first embodiment, symbol data dedicated to reduced display displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is set corresponding to a third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 shown in FIG. deep. Then, when the power is turned on, among the symbol data of the reduced symbol, three symbols (turtle), four symbols (shark), and a shell symbol (sub-symbol) are read out from the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 first, and used for resident use. It is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the video RAM 235.

  Next, until all the image data is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the read reduced symbol data is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by arranging three symbols in a horizontal line. Are displayed, and the display is repeatedly changed (display is switched in order).

  If it is a big hit, if it is a probability change big hit (big hit A), three symbols (turtles) are stopped and displayed on the left and right, and after reaching the reach display mode, three symbols (turtles) are stopped on the middle symbol. Notify the player of the probability change jackpot. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot B), four symbols (sharks) are stopped and displayed on the left and right, the reach display mode is set, and then four symbols (sharks) are displayed on the middle symbol, thereby giving a normal jackpot. To the player. In the case of a deviation determination result, if the display is a fluctuation display of less than 10 seconds, four symbols (shark) on the left and three symbols (turtle) are stopped and displayed on the right, and then four symbols (medium symbols) are displayed on the middle symbol. The shark), the three designs (turtle) and the shell design are stopped to notify that they have come off. Further, when the fluctuation time is, for example, 10 seconds or more, three symbols (turtle) or four symbols (shark) are stopped on the left and right, and as a reach display mode, three symbols different from the shell symbol or the reach symbol in the middle symbol ( By stopping and displaying the turtle) or the four symbols (shark), the user is notified of the departure.

  In this way, by using the symbols actually used and displaying the variable display that is displayed during the image transfer when the power is turned on, the player can confirm the same symbols as the normal variations. You can play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a disadvantage that the player does not play the game until the image data is completely transferred.

  Further, by using the reduced symbol data as a simple image, it is not necessary to store data dedicated to the simple image, and the data amount of the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  Further, by using the reduced symbol data used in a normal game as a simple image, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the reduced symbol having a small number of pixels is first transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, small image data can be transferred first, and the transfer time can be shortened. Therefore, it takes time before the image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b when the power is turned on, and it is possible to suppress a problem that a game cannot be performed.

  Further, as another form different from the present embodiment, a probability change jackpot C composed of two rounds or the like is set, and the reduced symbol data to be transferred at power-on at the time of power-on is 3 symbols (turtle), 4 symbols (shark). ) In the case of a jackpot C as one symbol (octopus) and shellfish symbol, the symbols are stopped and displayed as three symbols (turtle), four symbols (shark), and one symbol (octopus) from the left symbol, and the symbol is the jackpot C. Naturally, it may be configured to notify the player of the fact. In this way, by transferring only the minimum reduced symbol data necessary for the notification of the game, such as the jackpot type, the transfer time of the image data required for the simplified image displayed at power-on can be shortened. Can be played even when the power is turned on.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the required reduced symbol data among the reduced symbol data is configured to be transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b first, and the reduced symbol data is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. Although the display is configured to be displayed in the same size (actual size display) as that of the third design displayed in the normal display area PL1, the transferred reduced design is enlarged and displayed in the same size as the third design displayed in the normal display area PL1. May be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game closer to a normal game after turning on the power.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the symbol is a fish and shellfish, the background color of the third symbol display device 81 is also displayed in a simple image such as blue so that a game closer to a normal game is performed for the player. Can be made.

<Second embodiment>
<Regarding Display Mode in Second Embodiment>
Next, a display mode in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the state where the third symbol is displayed in the double reach display mode, it is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 in the reach display mode of the positive variation symbol. The configuration in which the third symbol is displayed in a reduced size has been described (see FIG. 7B). However, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, when the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 in a state where the third symbol is displayed in the double reach display mode, As shown in FIG. 10A, two types of symbols in the double reach display mode displayed in the normal display area PL1 are displayed on the reduced display line S1 of the reduced display area PL2.

  More specifically, eight symbols, which are normal symbols, are displayed with high transparency, and nine symbols are superimposed and displayed with a symbol having low transparency. By displaying in this manner, even if the third symbol is the reduced display area PL2 configured with a vertical width capable of displaying one symbol, a double-reach display mode of eight symbols and nine symbols is displayed. Can be determined. Therefore, even if the third symbol is hidden from the normal display area PL1 and displayed in a reduced size in the reduced display area PL2 to the player, the double reach display mode is maintained as before the reduced display. The state can be determined. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Also, when the third symbol is displayed in a superimposed manner, the symbol which is a symbol of the player's big hit is displayed by displaying the transparency of the symbol 8 which is a normal symbol with a high transparency and the transparency of the symbol 9 which is the variable symbol with a low transparency. The player can be notified of a symbol having a high degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the second embodiment, one of the two types of the double-reach display mode is displayed in a state of high transparency and displayed in a superimposed manner. This is informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to alternately display two types of symbols in the double reach display mode at regular intervals. In detail, one symbol is hidden and the other symbol is switched and displayed every two seconds or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player of the double reach display mode to the player. In addition, the switching cycle and the like may be set as appropriate, but by changing it in accordance with the scroll speed of the middle symbol in the reduced display area PL2, it is possible to easily know whether or not the combination will be a hit to the player. In detail, during the period when the winning combination is displayed on the middle symbol, the same symbol as the middle symbol is displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, and the middle symbol is displayed on the other symbols. By switching to another symbol at the timing of scrolling and switching and displaying the left symbol and the right symbol, it is possible to inform the player of whether or not the winning will be easier to understand.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the effect driven by the driving device 800 is executed in the double reach display mode, the process of reducing and displaying the symbol is executed. At that time, a configuration has been described in which one of the two symbols in the reach display in the double reach display mode is reduced and displayed. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the symbols are reduced and displayed in the double reach display mode, the two reach symbols are switched and displayed at predetermined intervals. This is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  Next, a symbol reduction process 2 (S3120), which is one of the symbol calculation processes (FIG. 44, S2903) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the symbol reduction display processing 2 (S3120).

  In the symbol reduction display process 2 (FIG. 50, S3120), first, it is determined whether the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the double reach display mode (S3121). When it is determined that the display mode is the double-reach display mode (S3121: Yes), both the symbol sprite data of the reach symbols constituting the double-reach display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are grasped. (S3122). The coordinates of the symbol to be reduced and displayed are set (S3123). As the coordinates set here, (x, y) data of the reduced display area PL2 is set as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10A, both symbols in the double reach display mode are displayed in the reduced display area PL2 at the same coordinates. Therefore, the same left and right coordinates are set for both symbols as the coordinates set in the process of S3123.

  Next, scale information of the symbol to be reduced is set (S3124). Update of parameters required for other symbol display is executed (S3125). In the present embodiment, the size of the symbol to be reduced and displayed is set to be 1/8 the size of the symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1. The size of the symbol displayed in the reduced display area PL2 is not particularly limited to this size, but depends on the size of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the size of the reduced display area PL2, and the like. It may be determined appropriately.

  It is determined whether it is the symbol switching period (S3126). The determination as to whether this is the symbol switching period is made by measuring the time from the start of the reduced display of the symbol and switching the symbol switching period every three seconds. In other words, for three seconds after it is determined that the symbol switching period is set (S3126: Yes), it is determined that the symbol switching period is set. Thereafter, it is determined that it is not the symbol switching period for 3 seconds. Here, it is measured by a timer (not shown), and it is determined whether or not the period is every three seconds.

  In the process of S3126, when it is determined that it is the symbol switching period (S3126: Yes), the whole α data of the lower numbered symbol among the reach symbols is set to be transparent (S3127). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is outside the symbol switching period (S3126: No), the α data for the whole of the symbol with the larger number among the reach symbols is set to be transparent (S3128). Here, the overall α data is data for setting the transparency of the entire symbol as described above. When the state is set to the completely transparent state (transparent), the α data for the whole is set to “0”. Further, the α data for the whole of the symbol which is not set to be transparent is set to “1”. Thereafter, the reduced display designation information is stored (S3129).

  On the other hand, in the process of S3121, when it is determined that the mode is not the double reach display mode (S3121: No), the symbol sprite data of the reach symbol is grasped (S3130). The coordinates of the reduced display area PL2 for displaying the symbol are set (S3131). Reduction scale information to be set when the symbol is displayed in a reduced size is set (S3132). Updating of parameters required for displaying other symbols is executed (S3133). Note that the processes in S3131 to S3133 are set in the same manner as in S3123 and S3125 described above. After that, the process of S3129 is executed.

  With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 10A, the “8” symbol and the “9” symbol are respectively displayed at the same coordinates in the reduced display area PL2, so that the symbols are displayed at positions overlapping each other. In this case, if both are displayed in the opaque state, it becomes difficult for the players to identify each other's symbols. However, as in the configuration of the second embodiment, every predetermined time (3 seconds in this embodiment) Each of the patterns is alternately set to be in the completely transparent state, so that the symbols can be easily identified. Therefore, even if the symbol is displayed in a reduced size, it can be easily recognized that the double reach display mode before the reduced display is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the player is uneasy with the game.

  In the present embodiment, the respective symbols are alternately made to be in a completely transparent state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured easily.

  Further, the configuration is such that the symbols are made to be in a completely transparent state alternately at predetermined time intervals, but may be configured to be switched at random times or in accordance with the movement of the central variable symbol. At this time, when the symbol in the center is the same as one of the reach symbols, by setting the symbol as a non-transparent symbol, the player can have a high expectation of a big hit.

<Third embodiment>
<Display Mode in Third Embodiment>
Next, a display mode in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, when the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the reduced display area PL2 in the state of being displayed in the double reach display mode as shown in FIG. 7A, as shown in FIG. 10B. Are displayed in the reduced display area PL2, indicating that the two types of symbols displayed in the double reach display mode have been merged.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fusion symbol is displayed in which the left half of the eight symbols and the right half of the nine symbols are in contact with each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily notify the player of the double reach display mode to the player. Therefore, even if the third symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is displayed in the reduced display area PL2 and is not displayed, the player can recognize that the special symbol is being drawn and play the game with confidence. be able to. In the present embodiment, as an example of the fusion symbol, an example of a symbol in which each of the symbols is combined by half is shown. Specifically, by setting a symbol such as a family crest or a temporary symbol different from a normal symbol as a fusion symbol, it is possible to easily notify the player that the symbol is a temporary symbol.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is switched from the normal display area PL1 to the reduced display area PL2, the driving device 800 is driven to the driving position to cover a part of the normal display area PL1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special display mode in which the third symbol is not displayed in the normal display area PL1 even when the driving device 800 does not drive to the driving position or when the driving device 800 is not provided. For example, when displaying a character, displaying a blackout that does not display anything, displaying an effect (displaying only light), and the like, the third symbol or a temporary substitute for the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. By displaying the symbol in a reduced size, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol is changing so that it is easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the effect driven by the driving device 800 is executed in the double reach display mode, the process of reducing and displaying the symbol is executed. At that time, a configuration has been described in which one of the two symbols in the reach display in the double reach display mode is reduced and displayed. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in the case of the double-reach display mode, when the symbols are displayed in a reduced size, two reach symbols are respectively displayed by half as shown in FIG. The configuration is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the configuration is configured to be combined and displayed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and its illustration and description are omitted.

  Next, a symbol reduction process 3 (S3140), which is one of the symbol calculation processes (FIG. 44, S2903) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. Reference numeral 51 is a flowchart showing the symbol reduction display process 3 (S3140).

  In the symbol reduction process 3 (FIG. 51, S3140) in the third embodiment, each of the processes from S3126 to S3128 is the same as the symbol reduction process 2 (FIG. 50, S3120) in the second embodiment described above in S3146. Has been changed to In the processes in S3121 to S3125, S3129, and S3130 to S3133, the same processes as those in S3141 to S3145, S3147, and S3148 to S3151 are executed. Detailed description of the same processing is omitted.

  In the process of S3145 in FIG. 51, if the process of updating other parameters is performed, then the process of S3146 is performed. In the process of S3146, the α data for the right half of the symbol with the small number among the reach symbols is set to “0” indicating transparency which is a completely transparent state, and the α data for the left half of the symbol with the large number is set to “0”. It is set to "0" indicating transparency, which is a completely transparent state (S3146).

  By executing the process of S3146 in this manner, as shown in FIG. 10B, the symbols indicating the symbols "8" and "9" are displayed in the reduced display area PL2 at the same coordinates. The right half (right half from the center of the symbol) of the smaller numbered "8" symbol and the left half of the "9" symbol (the left half from the center of the symbol) are set to be completely transparent. Thus, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), it is possible to display a symbol in which each of the eight symbols and the nine symbols is fused in half. Therefore, the player can display both symbols in the double reach display mode in the same display space as in the single reach display mode so that the player can recognize each of the symbols even when the symbols are displayed in a reduced size. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the state of the double reach display mode before the reduced display of the symbol is continuously maintained after the reduced display. As a result, a problem in which the player feels uneasy about the game can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, each of the symbols is set to be in a completely transparent state by half so that the respective symbols are displayed so as to be fused with each other. In this case, the design may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load when the symbols are displayed in a reduced size.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the respective symbols displayed in the double-reach display mode are configured to be combined and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a special symbol indicating the double-reach display mode (for example, The design of the character having the plate of “double reach” may be displayed in the same size (excluding the sub-design) as other designs. In this case, if the symbol scroll-displayed at the center is changed to a special symbol such as a symbol only such as "big hit" or "losing", the player can be informed easily. Furthermore, if the symbol in the center is changed to a special symbol such as “probably big hit” or “normal big hit” that can determine the type of big hit, the player can more maintain the expectation of the certain big hit. The exclusive design may be constituted by a design such as a family crest, for example.

<Fourth embodiment>
The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, when the effect driven by the driving device 800 is executed, the process of reducing and displaying the symbols is executed. At this time, the configuration has been described in which the scale information of the symbol sprite data displayed in the normal display area PL2 is reduced and set so as to be reduced. However, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that when a symbol is reduced and displayed, the symbol is reduced and displayed based on symbol sprite data dedicated to reduced display. This is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, so that its illustration and description are omitted.

  Next, the symbol calculation process 2 (S3020), which is one of the task processes (S2105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the symbol calculation process 2 (S3020).

  In the symbol calculation process 2 (FIG. 52, S3020), first, it is determined whether or not a symbol is being displayed in a reduced display area PL2 in a reduced display period (S3021). If it is determined that the period is for displaying the symbol in the normal display area PL1 (S3021: No), the symbol sprite data of the symbol to be displayed is grasped (S3022). Here, symbol sprite data for all symbol columns displayed in the normal display area PL1 is grasped. Next, the coordinates and scale information of each symbol to be displayed are grasped (S3023), and a process of updating the parameters of each symbol sprite data is executed (S3024). Note that when the symbols are displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) in the normal display area PL1, the symbols are scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction. It is set based on the set display data table.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3021 that the display is in the reduced display period (S3021: Yes), the symbol sprite data for reduced display is grasped (S3025). The coordinates and scale information (size) of each symbol to be displayed are grasped (S3026). The parameters of the symbol sprite data for each reduced display are updated (S30267). Here, when a symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2, it is set to the coordinates for displaying the symbol set by the display data table so that the central symbol displayed in the central column is scrolled vertically. ing.

  It is to be noted that in the design sprite data for reduced display, design sprite data dedicated to reduced display is set in the character ROM 234 in advance corresponding to each of the symbols (a) to (i) shown in FIG. With this configuration, when a symbol displayed in the normal display area PL1 is displayed in a reduced size, there is a problem that the symbol is broken and the visibility is reduced depending on the reduction ratio. With such a configuration, such a problem can be suppressed. In such a case, the design sprite data dedicated to reduction is set in advance in a size to be displayed in the reduced display area PL2, and is not set to be reduced by the scale information.

  It is determined whether or not the symbol is displayed at the position where the partial display of the symbol is executed (S3028). Here, the state where the partial display of the symbol is executed is, if the symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, if there is a symbol displayed outside the normal display area PL1. The symbols must be displayed in a completely transparent state. When a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is scrolled and displayed in the horizontal direction, so that the symbol in the horizontal direction (for example, half of the symbol in the horizontal direction) is displayed in a completely transparent state. On the other hand, when the reduced display is set, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, among the symbols displayed in the reduced display area PL2, the central symbol in the central row scrolls vertically. Therefore, depending on the coordinates (position) where the symbol is displayed, a part of the symbol displayed outside the reduced display area PL2 is displayed in a completely transparent state. When the display is reduced, as shown in FIG. 8A or 8C, a part of the design in the vertical direction (for example, the upper half) is displayed in a completely transparent state.

  Returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. In the process of S3028, when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the partial display of the symbol (S3028: Yes), it is determined whether the symbol is in the reduced display period in which the symbol is displayed in the reduced display area PL2. (S3029). If it is determined that it is during the reduced display period (S3029: Yes), the α data for the partial portion in the vertical direction is grasped (S3030). On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol display period is being displayed in the normal display area PL1 (S3029: No), the horizontal partial α data is set (S3031). Here, when a symbol is displayed in the normal display area PL1, the symbol is horizontally scrolled and displayed in a fluctuating manner, so that the horizontal area where the symbol is displayed outside the normal display area PL1 is in a completely transparent state. Is displayed.

  It is determined whether it is necessary to set the entire α data (S3032). Here, it is determined whether it is necessary to display the entire symbol in a transparent state. In the case where the entire symbol is displayed in a completely transparent state, it is set when it is necessary to show the background on the back side of the symbol as an effect. Further, even during the high-speed fluctuation display, the whole α data is set because the symbols need to be transparently displayed. As a result, the symbols can be displayed collectively in the transmission state, and the load in the transmission control can be reduced. Further, the α data for the whole is configured to be set for each symbol, but may be configured to be set for all symbols.

  If it is determined that the α data for the whole needs to be set, the process of S3033 is executed. In the process of S3033, the entire α data of each symbol is grasped and set (S3033). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no need to set the overall α data (S3032: No), the combination designation information is set (S3034). As the combination designation information, information obtained by combining the partial α data and the entire α data is set as transparent information.

  As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when a symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the reduced display area PL2, the symbol is displayed in a dedicated symbol. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the design becomes difficult to see due to deformation or the like. Therefore, it is possible to display a symbol that is easy for the player to see.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that a symbol dedicated to reduced display is set corresponding to a symbol to be displayed in the normal display area PL1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may be comprised so that a special design may be respectively set. With this configuration, the number of types of symbols for reduced display can be reduced, and the data amount of the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, it can be configured with a small capacity, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  It is to be noted that the configurations described in the first to fourth embodiments may be combined with each other.

  In the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are separately provided. Alternatively, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio ramp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be performed is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (ie, in use). ) May be provided in the image controller 237 so that the MPU 231 checks the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and the state of the resident It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when ending the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 checks the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether the scanning is in the blank period. When the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 to determine whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is unused, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since the image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. The image data not required to reside in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Note that the process of reading image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a main process loop executed by the MPU 231. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform important processes such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the respective video RAMs using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In a given address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this manner, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when specifying the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The configuration of the instruction for performing the designation can be simplified. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected between the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 237 may be directly connected. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Note that, even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. May be done. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low readout speed. However, by using the configuration described in the above embodiment, the display control device 114 can display an image at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The present invention is not limited to this. A first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after a system reset is released. May be stored in the boot program. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in an internal bus (bus line 240). , A first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on an internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided therein. May store a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, it is determined whether the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Since the character ROM 234 is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be.

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified for the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b determines that the address is specified in the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from and read out to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thus, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is started immediately. Can be. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (Line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described. However, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes or the like may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the character ROM 234 while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn. The process of writing the image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a possibility that the drawing process is delayed by writing the image data.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The content may be divided and the same content as each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write processing. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other external input, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. Preferably, it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since there is no image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is not overwritten while the power is turned on and the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are maintained is not limited to this. For example, when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from the user, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion. Good. In this case, while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You may leave. Further, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and reads the read image data into the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during the unused period (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer instruction). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and is transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not being used (that is, during a period in which the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three symbol display device 81. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 receiving the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read out image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal at the time of power failure is stored. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the RAM determination value is checked. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. May be configured. In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the momentary power failure and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to reduce the time required to recover from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modified example, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to an instantaneous stop or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently, and may be configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) that exchanges many data signals is provided. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the data transfer.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a period (blank period) during which a blank area, which is a scanning area other than the display area where an actual image is displayed, is scanned (blank period). The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of the image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. Thus, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while one area stores the image data read from the character ROM 234, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. And the time required for the processing can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236. can do. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are turned on. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on. As a result, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the power-on image from the character ROM 234 while displaying the power-on image. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since no image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed early and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying the main image, the reading of the image data from the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above-described embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation of the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring the image data to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Is also good. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 is used. , The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a back image change command or a frame button operation command is generated by the audio lamp control device 113, and the back image change command or the frame button operation command is generated by the display control device 114. The case has been described where the back image or the super-reach effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed based on the operation command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with a change in the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thus, the display control device 114 can change the effect of the rear image or the super reach in accordance with the game state based on the rear image change command or the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image or the super-reach effect mode according to the gaming state. Then, the image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the combined data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image data of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 and The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 39). The warning image setting process (refer to FIG. 43) may be executed when it is determined that a warning image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since the transmission and reception of the error command from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are not required, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. However, instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of the magnet and intentionally entering the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is detected. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command notifying an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident. When the display controller 113 receives an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error from the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113, the display controller 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 Alternatively, the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and turning on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error. Accordingly, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image which notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the error message image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to immediately notify the magnetic field error. Can be deterred.

  When the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change a part or all of the color tones in one effect, the additional data table or the display data table uses the 1st symbol in the third symbol display device 81. The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of the sprite after the change in the sprite are associated with the address corresponding to the address in which the time during which the image for the frame is displayed (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is defined as one unit. Color information specifying a color tone may be defined. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of the sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the changed color tone in the sprite. When the color information is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the additional drawing content in the data table. Accordingly, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  When the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying an image to be displayed in one effect is defined by a display data table, the display data table includes an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed in correspondence with an address expressed as a unit (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds), and at that time, a sprite type to be replaced, a sprite type to be newly displayed, and a new sprite type to be displayed. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 stores, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list instead of the sprite to be replaced. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table includes transfer data information of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image according to the additional drawing content specified in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the effect that can be additionally displayed. It may be specified together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. When the MPU 231 determines the effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. May be configured.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used in the drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used in accordance with the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing image drawing based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, The case where only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is described has been described.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach may be added to the display data table. You may. Thereby, the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in an additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined not only to include the additional drawing contents but also to include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed in accordance with the additional drawing contents. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed by using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be specified. As compared with the case where the drawing contents and the transfer data information are specified, the load of the processing required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "change start-up", "high-speed change", "announcement effect", "normal reach", and "super reach". After specifying the elements required for the fluctuation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified fluctuation effect are combined into one, and a final regular display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. In many cases, a display common to each of the fluctuation patterns is performed for “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like. Thus, by making the fluctuation effects into elements and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, a case will be described in which the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of an image for one frame for which the rendering process is completed (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that an image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). Therefore, a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, the time interval can be maintained accurately without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer on which the rendered image is to be rendered based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information developed first from the other frame buffer. Has been described, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list, the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be expanded is displayed. May be alternately selected, the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer, and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits one frame of image information to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller 237 outputs a frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main controller 110 transmits the sound display controller 113 via the sound lamp controller 113 until the finalized display effect ends. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case where the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d. Further, in this case, until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113, the final display effect is performed. Each time the process is completed, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue to display the final display effect until a fluctuation pattern command or a demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where the demonstration effect changes the back image and stops and displays the third symbol including the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol including a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first stores the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 and the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. Transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the power-on main image on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 Can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command , A simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is desirably performed immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display using the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Also, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated by the sprite type itself, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be specified. The display control device 114 reads out from the character ROM 234 the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manage the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. It is no longer necessary to manage both the information specifying the character string and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233 instead. In this case, when instructing to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and It is determined whether or not is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When a transfer instruction for image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It is described whether the MPU 231 performs a process of not executing the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to determine whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. The sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is necessary, the MPU 231 sends the image data to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which only the image data corresponding to “back A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The image data corresponding to the two or more rear images may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, image data of a rear image used in a part of the super reach may be made to reside in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach having a high or expected appearance frequency resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. Times can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data designated by the character string from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The MPU 231 describes information relating to the required sprite type in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally read from the character ROM 234 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the image data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, when performing the fluctuation effect, a case was described in which the high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled so fast that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so as to be invisible, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 executes the main control of the reserved ball count command each time the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). Although the case where the signal is transmitted from the device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-reservation command from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 only when the value (N) of the special symbol retaining ball counter 203c increases in the main controller 110. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above-described embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance port 64 may be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the vertical direction. The design may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a direction or a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as a variety of gaming machines such as a game machine such as an arepachi, a sparrow ball, and a so-called pachinko machine combined with a slot machine.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols is provided, and is not provided with a handle for hitting a ball. Things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be described.
<Feature A group>
Display means having a display screen, and display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner and then stopping and displaying a plurality of identification images in a display manner showing a lottery result. In a gaming machine, at least one of the plurality of identification images is configured to be long on one side, and the display control means moves the identification image in a first area of the display screen during a first period. Display in the second period, which is smaller than the first region on the display screen, in the second period, the identification image is displayed side by side in the short direction of the long identification image on one side. A gaming machine A1 having display control means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, after a dynamic display is performed on a display unit having a display screen in a predetermined dynamic display mode, a plurality of long identification images are stopped and displayed by a display control unit in a display mode indicating a lottery result. Is done. In the display control means, the identification image is dynamically displayed by the display control means in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and in the area smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. In a certain second area, identification images are displayed side by side by the change display control means in the short direction of the long identification image on one side. Thus, the area in which the identification image is displayed can be changed according to the predetermined period. In addition, by displaying long symbols on one side in the short direction, the display area can be prevented from being occupied greatly in the long direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played using the display screen more effectively.

In the gaming machine A1, the display screen of the display unit is configured to have a long display screen on one side, and the identification image that is long on one side is configured to be long in the same direction as the display screen. A gaming machine A2 characterized by having
According to the gaming machine A2, one of the display means is constituted by a long display screen. The identification image is configured to be long in the same direction as the display screen. Therefore, by displaying the identification images side by side in the short direction, there is an effect that the long direction of the display screen can be effectively used.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, during the second period, driving means capable of driving to a driving position covering at least a part of the front surface side of the first region is provided, and the second region is provided with the driving unit. The gaming machine A3, wherein the game device A3 is set outside the first area covered by the driving device even when the device is driven to the driving position.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines A1 and A2. That is, during the second period, at least a part of the front surface side of the first region is covered by driving the driving unit to the driving position. Even when the driving means is driven to the driving position, the second area is set outside the first area covered by the driving means. Thus, even when the display of the identification image is hindered by the driving unit that drives to the front side of the display screen, the identification image can be moved to an area where the visibility can be prevented from being hindered by the driving unit and displayed. Therefore, even if the player makes the effect by the driving means on the front side of the display means, the identification image is displayed at a position visible to the player, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the display control means displays a display effect different from the identification image in at least a part of the first area during the second period. Machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, a display effect different from the identification image is displayed by the display control means in at least a part of the first area in the second period willow. By effectively using a display area other than the second area and performing a novel effect different from that in a normal case, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the change display control unit may switch the area for displaying the identification image from the first area to the second area or the second area to the first area. A gaming machine A5 for displaying a switching notification display indicating that a region is switched from a first region to the second region.

  In the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the area for displaying the identification image is switched from the first area to the second area or from the second area to the first area, the switching notification display indicating that the area is switched from the first area to the second area is changed display control. Displayed by means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the identification image is lost when the display area of the identification image is switched.

  In the gaming machine A5, the switching notification display is a process image in which the area is reduced from the first area to the second area, which is reduced and displayed every time the image is updated, or the second area is displayed from the second area. A gaming machine A6 comprising a process image in which a region is enlarged to one region.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A5. That is, a process in which the region is reduced from the first region to the second region, which is displayed in a reduced size each time the image is updated, or a process in which the region is expanded from the second region to the first region A switching notification display is configured by an image. Therefore, the switching of the display area of the identification image can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can more easily recognize that the identification image is displayed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the display effect displayed during the second period is a display effect selecting means for selecting one display effect from a plurality of display effects, and a display selected by the display effect selecting means. A gaming machine A7, comprising: a second area determination unit that determines at least one of the size and the position of the second area based on the effect.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6. That is, one of the display effects displayed during the second period is selected from the plurality of display effects by the display effect selecting means. Based on the display effect selected by the display effect selecting means, at least one of the size and the position of the second area is determined by the second area determining means. Thus, the size of the second area can be changed in accordance with the display effect, and the display effect can be displayed in the optimal display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect can be displayed more easily for the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7, at least one of the size and the position of the second area is changed in accordance with the driving of the driving means, so that the second area is formed in an area other than the area covered by the driving means. A gaming machine A8 having a second area changing means for changing an area.

According to the gaming machine A8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A3 to A7. That is, by changing at least one of the size and the position of the second area in accordance with the driving of the driving means, the second area is changed to an area other than the area covered by the driving means by the second area changing means. . Therefore, the degree of freedom can be increased depending on the position where the driving unit is driven. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be shown driving various driving means.
<Characteristic B group>
Display means having a display screen, and display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner and then stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result, In a gaming machine that notifies a lottery result of a game by combining some of the identification images, the display control means stops one of the identification image combinations other than the identification image among combinations of identification images indicating a hit. A dynamic display mode display control means for displaying and displaying the remaining one identification image in a special dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the remaining one identification image; Display control means for dynamically displaying the dynamic display mode, and for the second period, dynamically displaying the special dynamic display mode in a second area of the display screen smaller than the first area. Wherein the dynamic display mode display means displays the remaining one identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode in a predetermined direction on the display screen of the display means during the first period. A gaming machine B1 comprising display direction switching means for performing dynamic display and switching to a dynamic display in a direction different from the predetermined direction for the second period.

  According to the gaming machine B1, after the dynamic display on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. The lottery result is notified by combining some of the different identification images. Of the combinations of identification images that indicate a hit, one other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display mode display control unit of the display control unit. In the first period, the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in the first area of the display screen by the change display control unit of the display control unit. Also, during the second period, the special dynamic display mode is displayed by the switching unit of the display control unit in the second area smaller than the first area. The remaining one identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in a predetermined direction on the display screen during the first period, and moves in a direction different from the predetermined direction during the second period. The display is switched by the display direction switching means of the dynamic display mode display means. Thereby, when the identification image is displayed in the second area smaller than the first area, the case where the image is dynamically displayed in the first area and the dynamic display direction of the remaining one symbol in the special dynamic display mode Is changed, the player's attention can be directed to the identification image even when the display area is switched to a small area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the identification image from being reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, the display screen of the display means has a rectangular display area that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction, and the identification image is an image that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction similar to the display area. Wherein the dynamic display mode display means dynamically displays the identification image in a longitudinal direction of the display area during the first period, and the display direction switching means comprises A game machine B2 for switching the dynamic display of the identification image from a direction to a short direction.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the display screen of the display means is formed of a rectangular display area that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction. The identification image is composed of an image that is long in the horizontal or vertical direction, similar to the display area. In the first period, the identification image is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display mode display means in the longitudinal direction of the display area. The dynamic display of the identification image is switched from the long direction to the short direction of the display area by the display direction switching means. Thus, in the first period, the area in which the identification image is displayed is smaller in the second period than in the first period, so that the identification image is shorter than in the case where the design is dynamically displayed in the long direction of the identification image. By dynamically displaying in the direction, even in a display area for one symbol, the whole of the identification image can be easily understood even if it is dynamically displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the identification image. .

  In the gaming machine B2, in the first period, the identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed in an area in which two or more of the identification images can move in a long direction, In the second period, the identification image dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode is characterized in that less than 2 identification images are dynamically displayed in an area movable in a long direction. Gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, in the first period, the identification image is dynamically displayed in the special dynamic display mode in the long direction in an area where two or more identification images can move in the long direction. In the second period, the identification images are dynamically displayed in a special dynamic display mode in an area where less than two identification images can move in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, in the first period, it is possible to make the player recognize that the identification image is dynamically displayed by effectively using the area movable in the long direction. In the second period, the display area of the identification image in the second period can be made smaller by configuring the area in which less than two identification images can be moved in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a region in which an image other than the identification image can be displayed in the second period can be configured to be wide.
<Characteristic C group>
Display means having a display screen, and display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner and then stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result, In a gaming machine that notifies a lottery result of a game by combining some of the identification images, the display control means may move the identification image in a first area of the display screen during a first period. Change display control means for displaying the identification image in the second area which is smaller than the first area of the display screen if the second image is in the second period; A dynamic display mode display control means for stopping and displaying other than the one of the identification images in the combination and displaying the remaining one of the identification images in a special dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the other identification image; The target display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which a portion other than one identification image is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating one hit, and a combination other than one identification image in a combination indicating a plurality of hits. The multi-special dynamic display mode in which the display is stopped is set, and the identification images displayed in the multi-special dynamic display mode are individually displayed in different areas during the first period. In the gaming machine C1, during the second period, different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed in the same area, and one remaining identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area.

  According to the gaming machine C1, after the dynamic display on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. The display control means dynamically displays the identification image in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and the second area which is smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. The identification image is displayed by the change display control means. Dynamic display mode display control of the display control means in a special dynamic display mode in which a display other than one identification image among the combinations of identification images indicating a hit is stopped and displayed, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed. Displayed by means. The special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which one of the combinations indicating one hit is stopped and displayed other than one identification image, and a combination other than one identification image among the combinations indicating a plurality of hits. The double special dynamic display mode in which the display is stopped is set. Each identification image displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode is individually displayed in a different area during the first period, and the different identification images stopped and displayed in the same area during the second period. Then, the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area. Accordingly, even in the multiple special dynamic display mode, the display space of the identification image displayed in the second area can be configured to be smaller in a state where each of the identification images can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to secure a larger area in which an image other than the identification image can be displayed in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be presented with an effect having an impact different from the normal time in the second period.

  In the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, the identification images other than one identification image among the different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed with increased transparency. A gaming machine C2, which is provided.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special display mode displayed during the second period, the transparency of the identification images other than the one identification image among the different identification images stopped and displayed is reduced. Since the display is made higher, even when two identification images are displayed in an overlapping manner, there is an effect that each identification image can be more easily viewed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is switched and displayed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is satisfied with a predetermined condition. Since the display is switched each time the display is performed, the plurality of identification images can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner in the area where one identification image is displayed.

  In the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, an alternative image that can identify the type of the identification image stopped and displayed during the first period is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine C4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, an alternative that can identify the type of the identification image stopped and displayed during the first period. Since the image is stopped and displayed, the display space can be made smaller.
<Feature D group>
Display means having a display screen, display control means for dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner, and then stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result, and for a predetermined period from power-on. And a temporary display control means for displaying a temporary identification image in place of the identification image, wherein the display control means includes a temporary display control means for displaying the temporary identification image in a first area of the display screen during a first period. Changing display control means for dynamically displaying the identification image in a second area, which is smaller than the first area of the display screen, during the second period. The identification image is displayed in the first display area based on the normal identification image data, and is displayed in the second display area based on reduced identification image data smaller than the normal identification image data. Reduced identification image In at least configured, the temporary display control means, on the basis of the reduced identification image data, the gaming machine wherein said is for displaying the temporary identification image D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, after the dynamic display on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. A temporary identification image replacing the identification image is displayed by the temporary display control means for a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The display control means dynamically displays the identification image in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and displays the identification image in an area smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. The identification image is dynamically displayed in a certain second area by the change display control means. The identification image includes a normal identification image displayed in the first display area based on the normal identification image data, and a reduced identification image displayed in the second display area based on the reduced identification image data smaller than the normal identification image data. At least. The temporary identification image is displayed by the temporary display control means based on the reduced identification image data. Thus, for a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the temporary identification image can be displayed based on the reduced identification image data having a small data amount. Therefore, the lottery game can be executed in a shorter period after the power is turned on. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game more efficiently.

  In the gaming machine D1, a normal reading unit that reads predetermined display data necessary for displaying a display mode on the display screen based on that the gaming machine is powered on, A gaming machine D2, further comprising: a pre-reading unit that reads out the reduced image data beforehand, and wherein the predetermined period includes a period until the normal reading unit completes reading.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, predetermined display data necessary for displaying the display mode on the display screen is read by the normal reading means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine. The reduced image data is read by the pre-reading means before the normal reading means. A predetermined period is constituted by a period until the reading unit normally completes reading. Thereby, even before display data necessary for displaying the display mode on the display screen is read, the game can be played by displaying the reduced image. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result can be notified at an early timing after the player turns on the gaming machine by using the identification image in which the lottery result is easy to understand.

  In the gaming machine D2, the normal identification image and the reduced identification image each include a plurality of types of identification images corresponding to each other in a pair, and the advance reading unit reads at least one of the reduced identification images. A gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, a normal identification image and a reduced identification image are composed of a plurality of types of identification images each corresponding to one pair. At least one of the reduced identification images is read by the pre-reading means. Therefore, the time required for the pre-reading means to read the reduced symbol can be reduced, and the period from when the power is turned on to when the game can be started can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine D2 or D3, the temporary display control means dynamically enlarges and displays the reduced identification image.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the reduced identification image is enlarged and dynamically displayed by the temporary display control means, so that the display data necessary for the game is not read out. Even if there is, there is an effect that the identification image can be displayed large and the lottery result can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines D2 to D4, when the lottery result is a hit, the game machine has a privilege game giving means for giving either a normal jackpot or a special jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the normal jackpot. The display control means, when the bonus game is provided by the bonus game providing means, stops and displays a normal jackpot identification image indicating that a normal jackpot is provided, out of the identification images, When the special jackpot is given by the giving means, the special jackpot identification image indicating that the special jackpot is given is stopped and displayed in the identification images, and the preliminary reading means is the normal jackpot. At least one reduced identification image corresponding to each of the identification image and the special jackpot identification image is read out. Game machine D5 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, if the lottery result is a hit, one of the normal jackpot and the special jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the normal jackpot is given to the privilege game giving means. Is given by When the bonus jackpot is provided by the bonus game providing means, the normal jackpot identification image indicating that the normal jackpot is provided is stopped and displayed in the identification image, and the special jackpot is provided by the bonus game providing means. In the identification image, a special jackpot identification image indicating that a special jackpot is given is stopped and displayed by the display control means. At least one reduced identification image corresponding to each of the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image is read by the pre-reading means.

  In this way, even if one of the normal jackpot and the special jackpot is won before the predetermined display data is read out, the player is notified based on the reduced identification image of which one of the jackpots was won. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the lottery result can be notified to the player more easily.

In the gaming machine D5, the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image are configured by combining and displaying a plurality of the same type of identification images, respectively.
The gaming machine D6, wherein the pre-reading means reads at least one identification image constituting the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image.

According to the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D5. That is, the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image are displayed by combining a plurality of the same types of identification images. At least one identification image that constitutes the normal jackpot identification image and the special jackpot identification image is respectively read by the pre-reading means. As a result, the amount of data read by the pre-reading means can be reduced, and the time required until the game starts can be reduced.
<Feature E group>
A gaming machine comprising: a display unit having a display screen; and a display control unit that dynamically displays on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and then stops and displays the identification image in a display mode showing a lottery result. Wherein the display control means comprises: a first area and a simultaneous display control means for dynamically displaying an identification image indicating a lottery result of a similar game in a second area different from the first area; If there is, the identification image displayed in the first area is displayed so as to be visually recognizable, and the identification image displayed in the second area is dynamically displayed in a transparent display mode that is difficult to visually recognize. Visual recognition switching means for displaying the identification image displayed in the first area in the transparent display mode, and displaying the identification image displayed in the second area so as to be visually recognizable. Gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, after dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control means in a display manner showing the lottery result. In the display control means, in the first area and a second area different from the first area, an identification image indicating a similar game lottery result is dynamically displayed by the simultaneous display control means. In the first period, the identification image displayed in the first area is displayed so as to be visible, and the identification image displayed in the second area is dynamically displayed in a transparent display mode that is difficult to view. The identification image displayed in the first area is displayed in the transparent display mode, and the identification image displayed in the second area is displayed so as to be visually recognized by the visual switching unit. This makes it possible to switch the display of the identification image between the first area and the second area by switching whether the identification image is visible or difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load for switching to the display area of the identification image can be reduced.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a dynamic display of an identification information sequence composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, followed by a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and displays a fluctuating effect or a jackpot effect according to the result of the drawing on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. .
In such a pachinko machine, a display area for displaying a determination symbol for notifying a player of a lottery result is driven in a special effect mode different from the determination symbol or a drive device driven on the front side of the display area to produce a game effect. There is a method for performing the above-mentioned operation (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2011-125416).
In this type of pachinko machine, when the drive device is driven to a position where viewing is obstructed, or when a special effect mode is displayed, if a determination symbol is displayed at a visible position, the visible display area may be limited. Was.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine that can effectively utilize a display area.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a display unit having a display screen, and a dynamic display on the display unit in a predetermined dynamic display mode, and then an identification image in a display mode showing a lottery result. Display control means for stopping and displaying the game, and by notifying the lottery result of the game by combining some of the plurality of different identification images, the display control means, if the first period, the A change display in which the identification image is dynamically displayed in a first area of the display screen, and in a second period, the identification image is displayed in a second area smaller than the first area of the display screen. A dynamic display in which a control means and a combination of identification images indicating a win are displayed in a special dynamic display mode in which a display other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed. Aspect A special special dynamic display mode, wherein the special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which a display other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed, and a plurality of hits. Among the combinations shown, a multiple special dynamic display mode in which a display other than one identification image is stopped and displayed is set, and each of the identification images displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode is the first During the period, the different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed in the same region during the second period, and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed in the different region during the second period. Things.
In the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1, in the gaming machine according to the technical concept 2, in the double special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is identified. The identification image other than the image is displayed with a high degree of transparency.
In the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 or 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1 or 2, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed. Are switched and displayed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, after the dynamic display is performed on the display unit having the display screen in the predetermined dynamic display mode, the identification image is stopped and displayed by the display control unit in the display mode indicating the lottery result. .
The display control means dynamically displays the identification image in the first area of the display screen during the first period, and the second area which is smaller than the first area of the display screen during the second period. The identification image is displayed by the change display control means. A dynamic display mode of the display control means in a special dynamic display mode in which a display other than one identification image among the combinations of identification images indicating combinations of hits is stopped and the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed. Displayed by the display control means.
The special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which one of the combinations indicating one hit is stopped and displayed other than one identification image, and a combination other than one identification image among the combinations indicating a plurality of hits. The double special dynamic display mode in which the display is stopped is set. Each identification image displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode is individually displayed in a different area during the first period, and the different identification images stopped and displayed in the same area during the second period. Then, the remaining one identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area.
Accordingly, even in the multiple special dynamic display mode, the display space of the identification image displayed in the second area can be configured to be smaller in a state where each of the identification images can be recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to secure a larger area in which an image other than the identification image can be displayed in the second period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be presented with an effect having an impact different from the normal time in the second period.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the multiple special display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is displayed. Since the identification images other than the identification image are displayed with a high degree of transparency, even when two identification images are displayed in an overlapping manner, there is an effect that each identification image can be more easily viewed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, in the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, the differently stopped display is performed. Since one of the identification images is switched and displayed each time the predetermined condition is satisfied, there is an effect that each of the plurality of identification images can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner in the area where one identification image is displayed.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device (display control means)
S1312 display performance selection means S2903 change the display control hand stage

Claims (3)

Display means having a display screen;
After dynamically displaying on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display manner, display control means for stopping and displaying the identification image in a display manner showing a lottery result,
In a gaming machine that notifies a lottery result of a game by combining some of the plurality of different identification images,
The display control means,
In the case of the first period, the identification image is dynamically displayed in the first region of the display screen, and in the case of the second period, the identification image is displayed in the second region which is smaller than the first region of the display screen. Change display control means for displaying the identification image,
Dynamic display mode display control means for stopping and displaying other than the one of the identification images among the combinations of the identification images which are combinations showing the hit, and displaying the remaining one of the identification images in a special dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying And having
The special dynamic display mode includes a single special dynamic display mode in which a display other than the one identification image is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating one hit, and one identification mode in a combination indicating a plurality of hits. A multi-special dynamic display mode in which non-images are stopped and displayed is set,
The respective identification images displayed in the multiple special dynamic display mode are individually displayed in different areas during the first period, and the different identification images stopped and displayed during the second period. Is displayed in the same area, and one remaining identification image is dynamically displayed in a different area.   In the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, the identification images other than one identification image among the different identification images stopped and displayed are displayed with high transparency. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein:   In the multiple special dynamic display mode displayed during the second period, one of the different identification images stopped and displayed is switched and displayed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images